User guide | Canon 8407B001 Digital Camera User Manual

Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera User Guide
ENGLISH
• Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety
Precautions” section (= 8), before using the camera.
• Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera
properly.
• Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the
future.
• Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
• To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter
title at right.
From chapter title pages, you can access topics by
clicking their titles.
©CANON INC. 2013
CDD-E553-010
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
1
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera
Wrist Strap
Battery Pack
NB-6LH
Getting Started
Battery Charger
CB-2LY/CB‑2LYE
Warranty Card
•A memory card is not included (= 2).
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
• SD memory cards*1
• SDHC memory cards*1*2
• SDXC memory cards*1*2
*1Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
verified to work with the camera.
*2UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
Preliminary Notes and Legal
Information
• Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images were
recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries and
affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential damages
arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory, including memory
cards, that result in the failure of an image to be recorded or to be
recorded in a way that is machine readable.
• Images recorded by the camera are intended for personal use. Refrain
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note that
even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright or other
legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some commercial
settings.
• The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
• Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision
manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet
design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective or may
appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera damage or
affect recorded images.
• The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic film for protection
against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the film before
using the camera.
• When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become warm.
This does not indicate damage.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
2
Part Names and Conventions in This
Guide
Zoom lever
Shooting:<i (telephoto)> /
<j (wide angle)>
Playback:<k (magnify)> /
<g (index)>
Lamp
Microphone
Lens
Mode dial
Shutter button
Power button
Speaker
Flash
Control ring
Strap mount
<h (Flash up)> switch
Wi-Fi antenna area
Tripod socket
Memory card/battery cover
DC coupler terminal cover
Cover
• Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in brackets.
• : Important information you should know
• : Notes and tips for expert camera use
• : Indicates touch-screen operations
• =xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents a
page number)
• Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
• For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
• The tabs shown above titles indicate whether the function is used for still
images, movies, or both.
Still Images
:Indicates that the function is used when shooting or
viewing still images.
Movies
:Indicates that the function is used when shooting or
viewing movies.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
3
Cover
zz
Turning the control dial is one way to
choose setting items, switch images, and
perform other operations. Most of these
operations are also possible with the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
Screen (LCD monitor)*
DIGITAL terminal
HDMITM terminal
<
(Ring function selector)> /
<a (Single-image erase)> button
Control dial
<e (Macro)> / <f (Manual
focus)> / Left button
Indicator
<1 (Playback)> button
Movie button
<b (Exposure compensation)> /
< (Wi-Fi)> / Up button
<h (Flash)> / Right button
FUNC./SET button
<l (Display)> / Down button
<n> button
*Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this case,
increase the sensitivity of the touch-screen panel (= 163).
• In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
• The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
<7> Control dial on back
<y> Control ring on front
<o> Up button on back
<q> Left button on back
<r> Right button on back
<p> Down button on back
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
4
Table of Contents
5
Package Contents..........................2
Compatible Memory Cards.............2
Preliminary Notes and Legal
Information......................................2
Part Names and Conventions
in This Guide...................................3
Table of Contents............................5
Common Camera Operations.........7
Safety Precautions..........................8
2
Basic Guide..................... 11
3
Initial Preparations........................12
Trying the Camera Out.................17
Advanced Guide.............. 21
1
Camera Basics......................21
On/Off...........................................22
Shutter Button...............................23
Shooting Modes............................23
Shooting Display Options.............24
Using the FUNC. Menu.................24
Using Menus.................................25
On-Screen Keyboard....................27
Indicator Display...........................28
Clock.............................................28
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode.................29
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings.........................................30
Common, Convenient Features....36
Using Face ID...............................41
Image Customization Features.....46
Helpful Shooting Features............49
Customizing Camera Operation...51
Other Shooting Modes.........53
Specific Scenes............................54
Image Effects (Creative Filters)....56
Special Modes for Other
Purposes.......................................61
Shooting Various Movies..............67
4
P Mode...................................69
Shooting in Program AE
([P] Mode).....................................70
Image Brightness (Exposure).......70
Color and Continuous Shooting....76
Shooting Range and Focusing.....80
Flash.............................................87
Shooting RAW Images..................90
Other Settings...............................91
Cover
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode..........93
Specific Shutter Speeds
([Tv] Mode)...................................94
Specific Aperture Values
([Av] Mode)...................................94
Specific Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values ([M] Mode)..........95
Customization for Shooting
Styles............................................96
Customizing the FUNC. Menu
(FUNC. Menu Layout).................100
6
Playback Mode...................103
Viewing.......................................104
Browsing and Filtering Images...108
Editing Face ID Information........ 112
Image Viewing Options............... 113
Protecting Images....................... 116
Erasing Images........................... 118
Rotating Images..........................120
Tagging Images as Favorites......121
Convenient Control:
Touch Actions..............................122
Editing Still Images.....................124
Editing Movies............................128
7
Wi-Fi Functions..................130
What You Can Do with Wi-Fi......131
Preparing to Share Images via
Wi-Fi...........................................132
Registering Web Services...........133
Installing CameraWindow on a
Smartphone................................136
Preparing to Register a
Computer....................................137
Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu..........139
Connecting via an Access
Point............................................140
Connecting without an
Access Point...............................145
Connecting to Another
Camera.......................................147
Sending Images..........................148
Saving Images to a Computer....150
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)..............................151
Geotagging Images on the
Camera.......................................153
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi
Settings.......................................153
8
Setting Menu.......................156
Adjusting Basic Camera
Functions....................................157
9
Accessories........................166
System Map................................167
Optional Accessories..................168
Using Optional Accessories........169
Using the Software.....................173
Printing Images...........................176
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
5
10Appendix.............................184
Troubleshooting..........................185
On-Screen Messages.................188
On-Screen Information...............191
Functions and Menu Tables........193
Handling Precautions..................204
Specifications..............................204
Index...........................................208
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Precautions................................. 211
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
6
Cover
Common Camera Operations
Applying special effects
Before Use
4 Shoot
Common Camera
Operations
zz
Use camera-determined settings
(Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)...................................................... 30, 32
Vivid Colors
(= 56)
Poster Effect
(= 56)
“Aged” Photos
(= 57)
Shooting people well
I
Portraits
(= 54)
P
Against Snow
(= 54)
Fish-Eye Effect
(= 58)
Miniature Effect
(= 58)
Toy Camera Effect
(= 59)
Matching specific scenes
Night Scenes
(= 54)
S
Under Water
(= 54)
t
Fireworks
(= 55)
Background Defocus
(= 60)
Starry Skies
(= 64)
Soft Focus
(= 60)
Monochrome
(= 61)
zz
Focus on faces.................................................................... 30, 54, 83, 85
zz
Without using the flash (Flash Off).................................................. 31, 88
zz
Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)......................................... 38, 63
zz
Add a date stamp.................................................................................. 40
zz
Use Face ID.................................................................................. 41, 108
zz
Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)................................... 32
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
7
1View
zz
View images (Playback Mode)............................................................ 104
zz
Automatic playback (Slideshow)..........................................................114
zz
On a TV............................................................................................... 169
zz
On a computer.................................................................................... 173
zz
Browse through images quickly.......................................................... 108
zz
Erase images.......................................................................................118
E Shoot/View Movies
zz
Shoot movies.................................................................................. 30, 67
zz
View movies (Playback Mode)............................................................ 104
zz
Fast-moving subjects, slow-motion playback........................................ 67
cPrint
zz
Print pictures....................................................................................... 176
Save
zz
Save images to a computer via a cable.............................................. 174
Use Wi-Fi Functions
zz
Send images to a smartphone............................................................ 132
zz
Share images online........................................................................... 133
zz
Send images to a computer................................................................ 151
Safety Precautions
• Before using the product, please ensure that you read the safety
precautions described below. Always ensure that the product is used
correctly.
• The safety precautions noted on the following pages are intended
to prevent injuries to yourself and other persons, or damage to the
equipment.
• Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
• Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage eyesight.
In particular, remain at least 1 meter (39 inches) away from infants when
using the flash.
• Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
Strap: Putting the strap around a child’s neck could result in asphyxiation.
Date/time battery (if removable): Dangerous if swallowed. If this occurs,
contact a doctor immediately.
• Use only recommended power sources.
• Do not attempt to disassemble, alter or apply heat to the product.
• Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
• To avoid the risk of injury, do not touch the interior of the product if
it has been dropped or otherwise damaged.
• Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke, a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
• Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
• Do not let the product come into contact with water (e.g. sea water)
or other liquids.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
8
• Do not allow liquids or foreign objects to enter the camera.
This could result in electrical shock or fire.
If liquids or foreign objects come into contact with the camera interior,
immediately turn the camera off and remove the battery pack/batteries.
If the battery charger (for cameras that use one) becomes wet, unplug
it from the outlet and consult your camera retailer or a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
• Do not look through the viewfinder (if your model has one) at bright
light sources, such as the sun on a clear day.
This could damage your eyesight.
• Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
• Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame.
• If your camera uses a battery charger, note the following
precautions.
-Unplug the power cord periodically, and using a dry cloth, wipe
away any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior
of the power outlet, and the surrounding area.
-Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.
-Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the power cord or plug are damaged, or not fully plugged into the
outlet.
-Do not allow dirt or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
The battery pack/batteries may explode or leak, resulting in electrical shock
or fire. This could cause injury and damage the surroundings. In the event
that a battery pack leaks and the battery electrolyte contacts eyes, mouth,
skin or clothing, immediately flush with water.
• Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the camera in places where use of electronic devices is
restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
Cover
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
Before Use
• When holding the camera by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
• Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
Common Camera
Operations
• Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
• When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the flash.
• Avoid using, placing or storing the product in the following places:
-Places subject to direct sunlight
-Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
-Humid or dusty areas
These could cause leakage, overheating or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns or other injuries.
High temperatures may deform the product.
• The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
• When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly.
If the lens becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the shards of glass
may lead to cuts.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• On cameras that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure
your finger is out of the way when the flash is lowered, to avoid
pinching it.
This could result in injury.
9
Cover
Caution
Denotes the possibility of damage to the equipment.
• Do not aim the camera at bright light sources (such as the sun on a
clear day).
Doing so may damage the image sensor.
• When using the camera on a beach or at a windy location, be careful
not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
• On cameras that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push
the flash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
• In regular use, small amounts of smoke may be emitted from the
flash.
This is due to the high intensity of the flash burning dust and foreign
materials stuck to the front of the unit. Please use a cotton swab to remove
dirt, dust or other foreign matter from the flash to prevent heat build-up and
damage to the unit.
• Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the camera.
If the battery pack or batteries are left inside the camera, damage caused
by leakage may occur.
• Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals
with tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.
• If your camera is used with a battery charger, keep the charger
unplugged when not in use. When charging the battery pack, do not
leave it covered with a cloth or put other objects on it.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in fire.
• If your camera uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that have
different levels of charge together, do not use old and new batteries
together, and do not insert the batteries with the + and – terminals
reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
• Do not sit down with the camera in your pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
• When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do
not come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that
it faces the camera body), if your camera has a screen that closes.
• Do not attach any hard objects to the camera.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• Do not leave the battery pack near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating or explosion,
resulting in fire or damage.
10
Cover
Basic Guide
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting and
playback
Initial Preparations............................................ 12
Trying the Camera Out...................................... 17
Attaching the Strap................................................. 12
Holding the Camera............................................... 12
Charging the Battery Pack..................................... 12
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card........ 13
Setting the Date and Time...................................... 15
Display Language.................................................. 16
Shooting (Smart Auto)............................................ 17
Viewing................................................................... 19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
11
Initial Preparations
Cover
Holding the Camera
Prepare for shooting as follows.
zz
Place the strap around your wrist.
zz
When shooting, keep your arms close to
Attaching the Strap
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the flash, do not rest your fingers
on it.
zz
Thread the end of the strap through the
strap hole ( ), and then pull the other
end of the strap through the loop on the
threaded end ( ).
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1 Insert the battery pack.
zz
The strap can also be attached to the left
zz
After aligning the  marks on the battery
side of the camera.
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in ( ) and down ( ).
2 Charge the battery pack.
zz
CB‑2LY: Flip out the plug ( ) and plug
CB-2LY
CB-2LYE
the charger into a power outlet ( ).
zz
CB-2LYE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
zz
The charging lamp turns orange and
charging begins.
zz
When charging is finished, the lamp turns
green.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
12
Cover
3 Remove the battery pack.
zz
After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
( ) and up ( ).
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted
in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera
(= 160).
1 Check the card’s write-protect
• To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
• For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the
charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction
or damage to the product.
tab.
zz
Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect tab when the
tab is in the locked (downward) position.
Slide the tab up until it clicks into the
unlocked position.
• For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time
possible with a fully charged battery pack, see “Number of Shots/Recording
Time, Playback Time” (= 205).
• Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when they are not
used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately before) the day of use.
• The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). For
power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for
the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may
damage the battery pack.
2 Open the cover.
zz
Slide the cover ( ) and open it ( ).
3 Insert the battery pack.
zz
While pressing the battery lock in the
Terminals Battery Lock
direction of the arrow, insert the battery
pack as shown and push it in until it clicks
into the locked position.
zz
If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always confirm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
13
Cover
4 Insert the memory card.
zz
Insert the memory card facing as shown
until it clicks into the locked position.
zz
Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
zz
Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
zz
The battery pack will pop up.
Label
5 Close the cover.
zz
Lower the cover ( ) and hold it down as
you slide it, until it clicks into the closed
position ( ).
• For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be saved on one
memory card, see “Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” (= 205).
Remove the memory card.
zz
Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
zz
The memory card will pop up.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
14
Cover
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this way
is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when you
manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
You can also add a date stamp to shots, if you wish (= 40).
1 Turn the camera on.
zz
Press the power button.
zz
The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
2 Set the date and time.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose an
option.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to specify the date and time.
zz
When finished, press the <m> button.
3 Set the home time zone.
4 Finish the setup process.
zz
Press the <m> button when finished.
After a confirmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
zz
To turn off the camera, press the power
button.
• Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/Time]
screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on. Specify
the correct information.
• To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [
] in step 2 and then
choose [ ] by pressing the <o><p> buttons or turning the <7> dial.
• You can also set the date and time by touching the desired option on the
screen in step 2 and then touching [o][p], followed by [
]. Similarly, you
can also set your home time zone by touching [q][r] on the screen in step 3,
].
followed by [
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose your home time zone.
15
Cover
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1 Access the camera menu.
zz
Press the <n> button.
2 Choose [Date/Time].
zz
Move the zoom lever to choose the [3]
tab.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the <m> button.
• Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the camera’s built-in
date/time battery (backup battery) after the battery pack is removed.
• The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you insert a
charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit (sold
separately, = 168), even if the camera is left off.
• Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will be
displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date and time as
described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 15).
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1 Enter Playback mode.
zz
Press the <1> button.
2 Access the setting screen.
zz
Press and hold the <m> button, and
3 Change the date and time.
zz
Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (= 15) to adjust the settings.
zz
Press the <n> button to close the
menu.
then immediately press the <n>
button.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
16
Cover
3 Set the display language.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose a language,
and then press the <m> button.
zz
Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
Still Images
Movies
Trying the Camera Out
Before Use
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
1 Turn the camera on.
• You can also set the display language by touching a language on the screen in
step 3 and then touching it again.
zz
Press the power button.
zz
The startup screen is displayed.
2 Enter [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
• The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after pressing the
<m> button before you press the <n> button. In this case, press the
<m> button to dismiss the time display and repeat step 2.
• You can also change the display language by pressing the <n> button
] on the [3] tab.
and choosing [Language
Common Camera
Operations
] mode.
zz
Set the mode dial to [
].
zz
Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
zz
Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
zz
Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
17
Cover
3 Compose the shot.
Shoot.
zz
To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
zz
Press the shutter button all the way
the zoom lever toward <i> (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward <j> (wide angle).
down.
zz
As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
zz
Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
zz
After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
zz
Even while the shot is displayed, you can
take another shot by pressing the shutter
button again.
4Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
Focus.
zz
Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
Shooting Movies
Start shooting.
zz
Press the movie button. The camera
zz
If [Raise the flash] appears on the screen,
move the <h> switch to raise the flash. It
will fire when shooting. If you prefer not
to use the flash, push it down with your
finger, into the camera.
Elapsed Time
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time.
zz
Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
zz
Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
zz
Once recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
18
Cover
zz
To access Scroll Display mode, turn the
Finish shooting.
zz
Press the movie button again to stop
<7> dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the
<7> dial to browse through images.
zz
To return to single-image display, press
the <m> button.
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
• You can make a short movie of the day (digest movie) just by shooting still
images. When the mode dial is set to [ ], the camera automatically records
a movie clip of the scene immediately before each shot (Hybrid Auto Mode
(= 32)).
zz
Movies are identified by a [
] icon. To
play movies, go to step 3.
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
3 Play movies.
1 Enter Playback mode.
zz
Press the <m> button to access the
zz
Press the <1> button.
zz
Your last shot is displayed.
zz
To view the previous image, press
the <q> button or turn the <7> dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the <r> button or turn the
<7> dial clockwise.
zz
Press and hold the <q><r> buttons to
browse through images quickly.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Viewing
2 Browse through your images.
Before Use
Volume
movie control panel, choose [ ] (either
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial), and then press the <m>
button again.
zz
Playback now begins, and after the movie
] is displayed.
is finished, [
zz
To adjust the volume, press the <o><p>
buttons.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
halfway.
19
Cover
Touch-Screen Operations
zz
To view the next image, drag left across
the screen in step 2, and to view the
previous image, drag right.
zz
To access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
zz
To return to single-image display from
Scroll Display mode, touch the image in
the middle of the screen.
zz
Choose a movie, and touch [ ] to start
playback.
zz
To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
Erasing the Images
Before Use
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1 Choose an image to erase.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
2 Erase the image.
zz
Press the <a> button.
zz
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the <m>
button.
zz
The current image is now erased.
zz
To cancel erasure, press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the <m>
button.
• You can also erase all images at once (= 119).
• You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the screen in
step 2.
• Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (= 122).
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
20
Cover
Advanced Guide
1
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Advanced Guide
Practical guide that introduces other camera basics and describes shooting and playback
options
On/Off................................................................. 22
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)......... 22
Shutter Button................................................... 23
Shooting Modes................................................ 23
Shooting Display Options................................ 24
Using the FUNC. Menu..................................... 24
Using Menus...................................................... 25
On-Screen Keyboard........................................ 27
Indicator Display............................................... 28
Clock.................................................................. 28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
21
Cover
On/Off
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
Shooting Mode
zz
Press the power button to turn the
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of
inactivity.
camera on and prepare for shooting.
zz
To turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Playback Mode
zz
Press the <1> button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
zz
To turn the camera off, press the <1>
button again.
• To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the <1> button.
• To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
halfway (= 23).
• The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera is in
Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is retracted by
pressing the <1> button.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity.
In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself
off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off
but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway (= 23).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of
inactivity.
• You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of Display Off, if
you prefer (= 159).
• Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other devices via
Wi-Fi (= 130), or when connected to a computer (= 174).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
22
Shutter Button
Cover
Shooting Modes
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
Before Use
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(= 17, 30, 32).
P, Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings
(= 69, 93).
focus.)
camera beeps twice, and AF frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
Scene Mode
Shoot with optimal settings for
specific scenes (= 54).
2 Press all the way down. (From
the halfway position, press fully
to shoot.)
zz
The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
zz
Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
• Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the
shutter button halfway.
• Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Creative Filters Mode
Add a variety of effects to images
when shooting (= 56).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to
zz
Press the shutter button halfway. The
Common Camera
Operations
Movie Mode
For shooting movies
(= 67).
You can also shoot movies
when the mode dial is not
set to Movie mode, simply
by pressing the movie
button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
23
Shooting Display Options
Press the <p> button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “On-Screen
Information” (= 191).
Using the FUNC. Menu
Configure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as
follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(= 195 – 197).
1 Access the FUNC. menu.
zz
Press the <m> button.
Display 1
Display 2
2 Choose a menu item.
• Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night display function
when you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how shots
are composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not match the
brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image distortion or jerky
subject motion will not affect recorded images.
• For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes” (= 106).
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose a
menu item.
zz
Available options are shown at the bottom
of the screen.
Options
Menu Items
3 Choose an option.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option.
zz
Options labeled with a [
] icon can
be configured by pressing the <n>
button.
zz
Options labeled with a [
] icon can be
configured by pressing the < > button.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
24
4 Finish the setup process.
zz
Press the <m> button.
zz
The screen before you pressed the
<m> button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you configured.
• To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default
settings (= 165).
Cover
Using Menus
Before Use
Configure a variety of camera functions through other menus as follows.
Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting [4],
playback [1], and so on. Note that available menu items vary depending
on the selected shooting or playback mode (= 198 – 203).
1 Access the menu.
zz
Press the <n> button.
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Configure Settings
zz
Access the FUNC. menu by pressing the
Options
Menu Items
<m> button, and then either drag the
menu up or down to scroll it, or touch a
menu item to choose it.
zz
Touch an option to choose it. Touch the
option again to confirm your choice and
return to the screen displayed before you
pressed the <m> button.
zz
You can access the screen for options
] icon by touching
labeled with a [
].
[
zz
You can access the screen for options
] icon by touching
labeled with a [
].
[
2 Choose a tab.
zz
Move the zoom lever to choose a tab.
zz
After you have pressed the <o><p>
buttons or turned the <7> dial to choose
a tab initially, you can switch between
tabs by pressing the <q><r> buttons.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
25
Cover
3 Choose a menu item.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose a menu item.
zz
For menu items with options not shown,
first press the <m> or <r> button to
switch screens, and then either press the
<o><p> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
select the menu item.
zz
To return to the previous screen, press
the <n> button.
4 Choose an option.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose an
option.
5 Finish the setup process.
zz
Press the <n> button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
<n> button in step 1.
Touch-Screen Operations
• To access tabs, press the <n> button to access the menu, and then
touch the desired tab.
• Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item to
choose it.
• Touch an option to choose it. Options shown with [q][r] icons on either
side can also be configured by touching these icons.
• For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the
desired position on the bar.
• To configure menu items for which options are not shown, first touch the
menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen, either
drag or touch to choose the menu item, and then touch to choose the
option. To return to the previous screen, touch [
].
• You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text fields) to
select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen keyboard.
• When [
] is shown, you can touch [
button, if you prefer.
• When [
] is shown, you can touch [
<n> button, if you prefer.
] instead of pressing the <m>
] instead of pressing the
• To dismiss the menu, press the <n> button again.
• To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default
settings (= 165).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
26
Confirming Input and Returning to
the Previous Screen
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (= 42),
Wi-Fi connections (= 139), and so on. Note that the length and type of
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.
Number of Available
Characters
Entering Characters
zz
Touch the characters to enter them.
zz
The amount of information you can enter
varies depending on the function you are
using.
Moving the Cursor
zz
Touch [
][
] or turn the <y> ring.
Entering Line Breaks
zz
Touch [
].
Switching Input Modes
zz
To switch to numbers or symbols, touch
[
].
zz
To switch between uppercase and
lowercase letters, touch [ ].
zz
Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Deleting Characters
zz
To delete the previous character, either
touch [ ] or press the <a> button.
zz
Holding down the <a> button will delete
five characters at a time.
zz
Press the <n> button.
• Another way to use the keyboard is by pressing the <o><p><q><r> buttons
or turning the <7> dial to select characters or icons, and then pressing the
<m> button. You can also move the cursor by turning the <y> ring.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
27
Indicator Display
Clock
The indicator on the back of the camera (= 4) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
Color
Indicator
Status
On
Green
Blinking
Cover
Camera Status
Connected to a computer (= 174), or display off
(= 22, 159)
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting images,
shooting long exposures (= 94, 95), or connecting/
transmitting via Wi-Fi
• When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open the
memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which may
corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
Before Use
You can check the current time.
Common Camera
Operations
zz
Press and hold the <m> button.
zz
The current time appears.
zz
If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch
to vertical display. Press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to change
the display color.
zz
Press the <m> button again to cancel
the clock display.
• When the camera is off, press and hold the <m> button, then press the power
button to display the clock.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
28
2
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Basic Guide
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings............................................................. 30
Shooting (Smart Auto)............................................ 30
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode................................ 32
Scene Icons........................................................... 34
Image Stabilization Icons....................................... 35
On-Screen Frames................................................. 36
Common, Convenient Features....................... 36
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)...... 36
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths
(Step Zoom)........................................................... 37
Using the Self-Timer.............................................. 38
Shooting by Touching the Screen
(Touch Shutter)....................................................... 39
Adding a Date Stamp............................................. 40
Advanced Guide
Using Face ID.................................................... 41
Helpful Shooting Features............................... 49
Registering Face ID Information............................ 41
Shooting................................................................. 43
Checking and Editing Registered Information........ 44
Using the Electronic Level...................................... 49
Magnifying the Area in Focus................................. 49
Checking for Closed Eyes...................................... 50
Image Customization Features........................ 46
Customizing Camera Operation...................... 51
Changing the Aspect Ratio..................................... 46
Changing Image Resolution (Size)........................ 47
Red-Eye Correction................................................ 47
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury
Lamps.................................................................... 48
Changing Movie Image Quality.............................. 48
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam........................... 51
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp........... 51
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots....... 52
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
29
Cover
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
3 Compose the shot.
zz
To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Zoom Bar
Still Images
the zoom lever toward <i> (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward <j> (wide angle). (A zoom bar
showing the zoom position is displayed.)
zz
Press the power button.
zz
The startup screen is displayed.
2 Enter [
] mode.
zz
Set the mode dial to [
].
zz
Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
zz
Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen (= 34, 35).
zz
Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Movies
Shooting (Smart Auto)
1 Turn the camera on.
Before Use
Focus Range (approx.)
4Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
Focus.
zz
Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
AF frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
zz
Several AF frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
30
Cover
zz
If [Raise the flash] appears on the screen,
move the <h> switch to raise the flash. It
will fire when shooting. If you prefer not
to use the flash, push it down with your
finger, into the camera.
Shoot.
zz
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
zz
As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
zz
Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
zz
After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Shooting Movies
Start shooting.
zz
Press the movie button. The camera
Elapsed Time
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time.
zz
Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
zz
Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
zz
Once recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
esize the subject and
R
recompose the shot as needed.
zz
To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3 (= 30).
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded, and movies
shot at zoom factors shown in blue will
look grainy.
zz
When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
31
3Shoot.
Finish shooting.
zz
Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
zz
Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
• The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has automatically
attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main subject and background (Multiarea White Balance).
Still Images
Movies
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
1 Enter [ ] mode.
zz
Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(= 30) and choose [
].
2 Compose the shot.
zz
Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (= 30) to compose the shot and
focus.
zz
For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
Cover
zz
Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
Before Use
(= 30) to shoot a still image.
zz
The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
Common Camera
Operations
] mode, because
• Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
• A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ ] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
• Sounds and vibration caused by camera operation will be recorded
in digest movies.
• Digest movie quality is [
] and cannot be changed.
• Some camera sounds will be muted. Sounds are not played when you press
the shutter button halfway or trigger the self-timer (= 157).
• Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following cases even if
they were recorded on the same day in [ ] mode.
-The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the total recording
time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20 seconds.
-The digest movie is protected (= 116).
-Daylight saving time (= 15) or time zone (= 158) settings are changed.
-A new folder is created (= 162).
• Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased.
• If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust the setting in
advance. Press the <n> button, and on the [4] tab, set [Digest Type] to
[No Stills] (= 25).
• Individual chapters can be edited (= 129).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
32
Cover
Digest Movie Playback
• You can change how long images are displayed after shots (= 52).
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play a digest movie, or specify the
date of the digest movie to play (= 107).
Common Camera
Operations
Movies
Basic Guide
Still Images/Movies
Microphone
• If the camera is turned on while the <p> button is held down, the
camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press the
<n> button and choose [Mute] on the [3] tab, and then press
the <q><r> buttons to choose [Off].
Still Images
• A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred
by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
• If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the
subject. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (= 206).
• The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when
you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the focusing
range (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (= 206).
• To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be
activated when shooting in low-light conditions.
• A blinking [h] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates
that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished recharging.
Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready, so either press
the shutter button all the way down and wait, or release it and press
it again.
• The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and Babies
(Sleeping) icons (= 34) are displayed.
• Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen is
displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus, brightness,
and colors used.
Before Use
• Keep your fingers away from the
microphone while shooting movies.
Blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may
cause the recording to sound muffled.
• Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
• Once movie recording begins, a smaller image display area is
shown, with the subject enlarged, as a measure when correcting
distortion such as rotational camera shake. To shoot subjects at the
same size shown before shooting, adjust the image stabilization
setting (= 91).
• Audio is recorded in stereo.
• Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can be reduced.
However, the recording may sound unnatural when this option is used when
there is no wind. When the wind is not strong, press the <n> button,
choose [Wind Filter] on the [4] tab, and then choose [Off] (= 25).
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
33
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Scene Icons
In [ ] and [
] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (= 35).
Subject
Background Normal
Backlit
Dark*
Sunsets Spotlights
–
People
–
–
–
–
–
–
Smiling
–
–
–
Sleeping
–
–
–
Babies
–
–
–
Smiling
–
–
–
Sleeping
–
–
–
–
–
–
In Motion
–
–
–
At Close Range
–
–
In Motion
Shadows on Face
Children (In Motion)
–
Other Subjects
*Tripod Used
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
•The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue, and the
background color of [ ] is orange.
•When shooting movies, only People, Other Subjects, and At Close Range icons will
be displayed.
•When shooting in [ ] mode, only People, Shadows on Face, Other Subjects, and At
Close Range icons will be displayed.
•When shooting with the self-timer, People (In Motion), Smiling, Sleeping, Babies
(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), Children, Other Subjects (In Motion) icons will not be
displayed.
•When the drive mode is set to [ ] (= 35), and when [Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to
[On] and scenes are automatically corrected (= 48), Smiling, Sleeping, Babies
(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children icons will not be displayed.
•If the flash is set to [ ], the Backlit icons for Smiling and Children will not be
displayed.
•Babies, Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children icons will be displayed
when [Face ID] is set to [On], and the face of a registered baby (under two years old)
or child (from two to twelve years old) is detected (= 41). Confirm beforehand that
the date and time are correct (= 15).
• Try shooting in [G] mode (= 69) if the scene icon does not match
actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot with your
expected effect, color, or brightness.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
34
Cover
Still Images
Continuous Shooting Scenes
If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed,
the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway
when one of the icons in the table below is displayed, one of the following
icons will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous
images: [ ], [ ], or [W].
Smiling (including Babies)
Sleeping (including Babies)
:Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
:Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam will not light up, the flash will
not fire, and the shutter sound will not be played.
W:So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
Children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
• In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
• Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first shot.
• When you want to shoot single images only, press the <m> button, choose
[ ] in the menu, and then select [ ].
Movies
Image Stabilization Icons
Before Use
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in [
and [
] modes.
]
Image stabilization for still
images
Image stabilization for movies,
reducing strong camera shake,
as when shooting while walking
(Dynamic IS)
Image stabilization for still
images when panning*
Image stabilization for slow
camera shake, such as when
shooting movies at telephoto
(Powered IS)
Image stabilization for macro
shots (Hybrid IS)
No image stabilization, because
the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other
means
*Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you follow
subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera
shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects moving
vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake.
• To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (= 91). In this case, an
IS icon is not displayed.
] icon is displayed.
• In [ ] mode, no [
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
35
Still Images
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
In [
] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects
subjects you are aiming the camera at.
• A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus.
However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white frame
will remain on the screen.
• When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus and
image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
• Try shooting in [G] mode (= 69) if no frames are displayed, if
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
• To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the screen. [
is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode. Pressing the shutter
button halfway will display a blue AF frame, and the camera will keep the
subject in focus and image brightness adjusted (Servo AF).
Cover
Common, Convenient Features
Movies
Before Use
Movies
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 20x enlargement.
1 Move the zoom lever toward
<i>.
zz
Hold the lever until zooming stops.
zz
Zooming stops at the largest possible
zoom factor (before the image becomes
noticeably grainy), which is then indicated
on the screen.
Zoom Factor
2 Move the zoom lever toward
<i> again.
zz
The camera zooms in even closer on the
]
subject.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
36
Cover
• Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change depending
on the zoom range.
-White range: optical zoom range where the image will not appear
grainy.
-Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not noticeably
grainy (ZoomPlus).
-Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy.
Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution
settings (= 47), the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by
following step 1.
• Focal length when optical and digital zoom are combined is as follows (35mm
film equivalent).
24 – 480 mm (24 – 120 mm with optical zoom alone)
• To deactivate digital zoom, press the <n> button, choose [Digital Zoom]
on the [4] tab, and then choose [Off].
Still Images
Movies
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths
(Step Zoom)
You can shoot at preset focal lengths of 24, 28, 35, 50, 85, 100 or 120 mm
(35mm film equivalent). This is convenient when you want to shoot at the
angle of view of those focal lengths.
To change the focal length from 24 to
zz
28 mm, turn the <y> ring
counterclockwise until it clicks. Keep
turning the <y> ring to increase the focal
length, which changes to 35, 50, 85, 100,
and 120 mm at each click.
• Step zoom is not available when shooting movies, so turning the
<y> ring has no effect.
• When you are using digital zoom (= 36), you cannot adjust the zoom factor
by turning the <y> ring counterclockwise. However, you can set the focal
length to 120 mm by turning it clockwise.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
37
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Using the Self-Timer
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other timed
shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter
button.
1 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [
]
in the menu, and then choose the []]
option (= 24).
zz
Once the setting is complete, []] is
displayed.
zz
Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a selftimer sound.
zz
Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the flash fires.)
zz
To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
<n> button.
zz
To restore the original setting, choose
[ ] in step 1.
Still Images
Movies
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you have
pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing
the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
2Shoot.
zz
For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
zz
For Movies: Press the movie button.
zz
Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 38) and choose [[].
zz
Once the setting is complete, [[] is
displayed.
zz
Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 38) to shoot.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
38
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Movies
Customizing the Self-Timer
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1 Choose [$].
zz
Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 38), choose [$] and press the
< > button.
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Turn the <y> ring to choose the [Delay]
Shooting by Touching the Screen
(Touch Shutter)
With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your finger to shoot. The camera will focus on
subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.
1 Enable touch-shutter function.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose
[Touch Shutter] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [On] (= 25).
time, either press the <q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose the number
of [Shots], and then press the <m>
button.
zz
Once the setting is complete, [$] is
displayed.
zz
Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 38) to shoot.
2 Choose a subject to focus on.
• For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay
before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.
• When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white balance are
determined by the first shot. More time is required between shots when the
flash fires or when you have specified to take many shots. Shooting will stop
automatically when the memory card becomes full.
• When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds before the
shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the flash fires.)
zz
Touch the subject on the screen and keep
your finger on the screen.
zz
The camera beeps twice after focusing. A
blue frame is displayed, and the camera
will keep the subject in focus and image
brightness adjusted (Servo AF).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
39
Cover
3Shoot.
zz
Release your finger from the screen. A
shutter sound is played as the camera
shoots.
zz
To cancel touch shutter, choose [Off] in
step 1.
• Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next shot
by touching [^].
• In [ ] mode, touching the screen in step 2 will display a green frame, and the
focus and brightness level will not change.
Still Images
Adding a Date Stamp
The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-right corner.
However, note that date stamps cannot be edited or removed, so confirm
beforehand that the date and time are correct (= 15).
1 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [Date
] on the [4] tab, and then
Stamp
choose the desired option (= 25).
zz
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
2Shoot.
zz
As you take shots, the camera adds the
Before Use
shooting date or time to the lower-right
corner of images.
zz
To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
Common Camera
Operations
• Date stamps cannot be edited or removed.
• Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one as follows.
However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already have one may
cause it to be printed twice.
-Print using printer functions (= 176)
-Use camera DPOF print settings (= 180) to print
-Use the software downloaded from the Canon website to print (= 173)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
40
Using Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [
] mode, the camera can detect babies and children based
on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when shooting.
This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered person
among a large number of images (= 109).
Personal Information
• Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with Face ID,
and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved on the camera.
Additionally, when registered people are detected, their names will be
recorded in still images. When using the Face ID function, be careful
when sharing the camera or images with others, and when posting
images online where many others can view them.
Cover
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
1 Access the setting screen.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [4] tab, and then
press the <m> button (= 25).
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add to Registry],
and then press the <m> button.
• When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces, names,
and birthdays) from the camera (= 46).
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add a New Face],
and then press the <m> button.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
41
Cover
2 Register face information.
zz
Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
zz
A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
zz
If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
zz
After [Register?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
zz
The [Edit Profile] screen is displayed.
3 Register the person’s name and
birthday.
zz
To register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <7>
dial), and then press the <m> button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose an
option.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to specify the date.
zz
When finished, press the <m> button.
4 Save the settings.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Save], and then
press the <m> button.
zz
After a message is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the <m>
button.
5 Continue registering face
information.
zz
Press the <m> button to access the
zz
To register up to 4 more points of face
keyboard, and then enter the name
(= 27).
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
zz
Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
42
Cover
• The flash will not fire when following step 2.
• If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
(= 34) will not be displayed in [
] mode.
• You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if you have not
filled all 5 face info slots (= 45).
Shooting
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that person
as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for that
person when shooting.
zz
When you point the camera toward a
subject, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected.
zz
Shoot.
zz
Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. Even if people are detected, but
their names are not displayed, the names
(up to 5 people) will be recorded in the
image.
• People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected as
the registered person if they share similar facial features.
• Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured image or
scene differs drastically from the registered face information.
• If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected, overwrite registered
information with new face info. Registering face info right before shooting will
allow for easier detection of registered faces.
• If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you continue
shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the image during
playback (= 112).
• Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they grow, you should
update their face info regularly (= 45).
• Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the [Shooting Info]
check box in [Custom Display] (= 98) on the [4] tab so that the names are
not displayed.
• If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose [Face ID
Settings] on the [4] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose [Off].
• You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen (simple
information display) (= 106).
• In [ ] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen, but they will be
recorded in still images.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
43
Cover
Checking and Editing Registered Information
1 Access the [Check/Edit Info]
screen.
zz
Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 41), choose [Check/
Edit Info] and press the <m> button.
2 Choose a person to check or
edit.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose the person to
check or edit, and then press the <m>
button.
3 Check or edit the information as
needed.
zz
To check a name or birthday, access
the [Edit Profile] screen by pressing the
<o><p> buttons or turning the <7>
dial and then pressing the <m> button.
On the screen displayed, you can edit
names or birthdays as described in step
3 of “Registering Face ID Information”
(= 42).
zz
To check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the <o><p>
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button. On the screen
displayed, choose face information to
erase by pressing the <o><p><q><r>
buttons and then the <m> button. After
[Erase?] is displayed, choose [OK] (either
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
• Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
• You can use the software to edit registered names. Some characters entered
with the software may not display on the camera, but will be correctly recorded
in images.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
44
Cover
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as
their faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been
filled.
1 Access the [Add Face Info]
screen.
zz
Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 41), choose [Add Face
Info] and press the <m> button.
2 Choose the name of the person
whose face info you want to
overwrite.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose the name
of a person whose face info you want
to overwrite, and then press the <m>
button.
zz
If five items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial),
and then press the <m> button.
zz
If less than five items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
3 Choose the face info to
overwrite.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose the face info
to overwrite, and then press the <m>
button.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
4 Register face information.
zz
Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 42) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
zz
Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
• You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled. Follow the
steps above to overwrite face information.
• You can follow the above steps to register new face info when there is at least
one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite any face information. Instead
of overwriting face info, first erase unwanted existing info (= 44), and then
register new face information (= 41) as needed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
45
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to Face
ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be erased.
1 Access the [Erase Info] screen.
Cover
Image Customization Features
Before Use
Still Images
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
zz
Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(= 24).
zz
Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
zz
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, also used for display on standarddefinition televisions or similar display devices, or for printing images at 3.5 x
5-inch or A-series sizes.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Square aspect ratio.
Index
2 Choose the name of the person
whose info you want to erase.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
• If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (= 108), search images for them (= 110), or
overwrite their info (= 112).
• You can also erase names in image information (= 113).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [
Information” (= 41) and choose [Erase
Info].
turn the <7> dial to choose the name
of a person to erase, and then press the
<m> button.
zz
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
Common Camera
Operations
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Same aspect ratio as 35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or
postcard sizes.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Aspect ratio commonly used for portraits.
• Not available in [
] mode.
46
Cover
Still Images
Changing Image Resolution (Size)
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on
how many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card, see
“Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” (= 205).
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [
] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(= 24).
zz
The option you configured is now
displayed.
zz
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
Still Images
Red-Eye Correction
Before Use
Red-eye that occurs in flash photography can be automatically corrected as
follows.
1 Access the [Flash Settings]
screen.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press
the <m> button (= 25).
2 Configure the setting.
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper
Size (for 4:3 Images)
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
zz
[ ]: For e-mailing images.
A3 – A5 (11.7 x
16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
choose [On] (= 26).
zz
Once the setting is complete, [R] is
displayed.
zz
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
5 x 7 in.
Postcard
3.5 x 5 in.
• Not available in [
zz
Choose [Red-Eye Corr.], and then
Common Camera
Operations
• Red-eye correction may be applied to image areas other than eyes (if
the camera misinterprets red eye makeup as red pupils, for example).
] mode.
• You can also correct existing images (= 127).
• You can also access the screen in step 2 when the flash is up by pressing the
<r> button and immediately pressing the <n> button.
47
Cover
Movies
• You can also access the screen in step 2 when the flash is up by pressing the
].
<r> button and then touching [
Still Images
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from
Mercury Lamps
Changing Movie Image Quality
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [
• Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results.
Basic Guide
]
in the menu, and choose the desired
option (= 24).
zz
The option you configured is now
displayed.
zz
To restore the original setting, repeat this
].
process but choose [
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [Hg
• After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should set
[Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not caused by
mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.
Common Camera
Operations
4 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum
movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card,
see “Recording Time per Memory Card” (= 206).
In [
] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multiarea White Balance.
Lamp Corr.] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [On] (= 25).
zz
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
zz
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Before Use
Image
Quality
Resolution
Frame Rate
Details
1920 x 1080*
60 fps
1920 x 1080*
30 fps
For shooting in Full HD
] enables movies with
[
smoother motion
1280 x 720
30 fps
For shooting in HD
640 x 480
30 fps
For shooting in standard
definition
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
*Fine Detail Movie Processing (This function quickly processes a large amount of
information, making it possible to record even finer details in movies.)
], [
], and [
] modes, black bars displayed on the top and
• In [
bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded.
48
Cover
Helpful Shooting Features
Still Images
Movies
Using the Electronic Level
An electronic level can be displayed on the screen when shooting as a
guideline to determine if the camera is level.
1 Display the electronic level.
zz
Press the <p> button several times to
• If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the <n> button, and
on the [4] tab, choose [Custom Display]. Add a [ ] to [ ] or [ ] to choose
the electronic level.
• Tilting the camera too far forward or backward will prevent you from using the
electronic level, which will turn gray.
• The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
• If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic level will be
updated automatically to match the camera orientation.
• If your shots are not level even if you use the electronic level, try calibrating
the electronic level (= 162).
display the electronic level.
Still Images
Magnifying the Area in Focus
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.
1 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [AF-
2 Level the camera as needed.
zz
Level the camera so that the center of the
electronic level is green.
Point Zoom] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [On] (= 25).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
49
Cover
2 Check the focus.
zz
Press the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnified.
zz
To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
Still Images
Checking for Closed Eyes
[ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
their eyes.
1 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [Blink
• The area in focus will not be magnified when you press the shutter
button halfway if a face was not detected, if the person is too close
to the camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement.
Detection] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [On] (= 25).
• The display will not magnify when using the digital zoom (= 36) or when
using a TV as a display (= 169).
• Not available in [ ] mode.
2Shoot.
zz
[ ] flashes when the camera detects a
person whose eyes are closed.
zz
To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
• When you have specified multiple shots in [$] mode, this function is only
available for the final shot.
• A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when you have
selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display Time] (= 52).
• This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [ ] mode
(= 79).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
50
Cover
Customizing Camera Operation
Still Images
Customize shooting functions on the MENU [4] tab (= 25) as follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using Menus” (= 25).
Still Images
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus when
you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [AFassist Beam] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [Off] (= 25).
zz
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce redeye when the flash is used in low-light shots.
1 Access the [Flash Settings]
screen.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press
the <m> button (= 25).
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Off] (= 26).
zz
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
51
Cover
Still Images
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
1 Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold]
(= 52).
2 Configure the setting.
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1 Access the [Review image after
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
shooting] screen.
<7> dial to choose [Display Info]. Press
the <q><r> buttons to choose the
desired option.
zz
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
zz
Press the <n> button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
[4] tab, and then press the <m> button
(= 25).
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <7> dial to choose [Display Time].
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose the
desired option.
zz
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Quick
Displays images only until you can shoot again.
2 sec., 4 sec., Displays images for the specified time. Even while the shot is displayed,
8 sec.
you can take another shot by pressing the shutter button halfway again.
Hold
Displays images until you press the shutter button halfway.
Off
No image display after shots.
Off
Displays only the image.
Detailed
Displays shooting details (= 192).
• When [Display Time] (= 52) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display Info] is set to
[Off] and cannot be changed.
• By pressing the <p> button while an image is displayed after shooting, you
can switch the display information. Note that the settings of [Display Info] are
not changed. You can also delete the image, by pressing the <a> button.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
52
3
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Other Shooting Modes
Basic Guide
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with unique image effects or
captured using special functions
Specific Scenes................................................. 54
Image Effects (Creative Filters)....................... 56
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range) .......................................... 56
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)................. 57
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect).................................................... 58
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect).................................................... 58
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)............................................... 59
Making Subjects Stand Out
(Background Defocus)........................................... 60
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect.......................... 60
Shooting in Monochrome....................................... 61
Special Modes for Other Purposes................. 61
Auto Shooting after Face Detection
(Smart Shutter)....................................................... 61
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)................................... 64
Shooting Various Movies................................. 67
Shooting Movies in [E] Mode............................... 67
Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies..................... 67
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
53
Cover
Specific Scenes
Still Images
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.
zz
Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
1 Enter [K] mode.
zz
Set the mode dial to [K].
2 Choose a shooting mode.
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [I] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(= 24).
3Shoot.
Still Images
Shoot evening scenes without using
a tripod (Handheld NightScene)
Movies
I Shoot portraits (Portrait)
zz
Take shots of people with a softening
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
zz
A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Still Images
Movies
S
Shoot underwater (Underwater)
zz
Natural-colored shots of sea life and
underwater scenery, when you use an
optional waterproof case (= 168).
zz
This mode can correct white balance and
match the effect of using a commercially
available color-compensating filter
(= 77).
effect.
Still Images
Movies
P
Shoot with snowy backgrounds
(Snow)
zz
Bright, natural-colored shots of people
against snowy backgrounds.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
54
Cover
Still Images
Movies
t
Shoot fireworks (Fireworks)
zz
Vivid shots of fireworks.
• Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
• In [ ] and [S] modes, shots may look grainy because the ISO
speed (= 72) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
• Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
• In [ ] mode, excessive camera shake or certain shooting
conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
• In [t] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures
to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should
set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (= 91).
• When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [
] mode instead
of [ ] mode will give better results (= 30).
• In [t] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
Still Images
Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range
If focusing is difficult in [S] mode (= 54) with a focus range of [ ],
using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal
underwater shots.
1 Configure the setting.
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 54) and choose [S].
zz
Press the <q> button, choose the desired
focus range (either press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button.
2Shoot.
Focusing Range
Underwater
Macro
8 Quick
Description
Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom for even closer shots.
Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting opportunities
when shooting subjects some distance away. Especially effective
for moving subjects.
f Manual Focus Focus on subjects manually (= 80).
Refer to “Shooting Range” (= 206) for details on the range of each focus range.
• In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle.
• In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear
grainy at some resolutions (= 47).
• In [8] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus. In this
case, try setting the focus range to [ ].
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• You can also configure this setting by pressing the <q> button, touching the
desired focusing range, and then touching it again.
55
Cover
Image Effects (Creative Filters)
Still Images
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
Posterized shots (Poster Effect)
zz
Shots that resemble an old poster or
1 Enter [ ] mode.
zz
Set the mode dial to [
Movies
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
illustration.
].
Before Use
Advanced Guide
2 Choose a shooting mode.
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [
] in
the menu, and then choose a shooting
mode (= 24).
3Shoot.
Still Images
Shoot in vivid colors
(Super Vivid)
zz
Shots in rich, vivid colors.
Movies
• In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make sure
you obtain the desired results.
Still Images
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-out
highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tends to occur in high-contrast
shots.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose
[ ].
2Shoot.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zz
Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
56
Cover
• Excessive camera shake or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
• If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount the camera on
a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally, you should set
[IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera
(= 91).
• Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
and combines the images.
Adding Artistic Effects
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose
[ ].
zz
Press the <p> button, choose an effect
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Natural
Images are natural and organic.
Art Standard
Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Art Vivid
Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Art Bold
Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Art Embossed
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and dark
ambiance.
Still Images
Movies
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)
This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old
photographs. Choose from five effect levels.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose
[ ].
2 Choose an effect level.
zz
Turn the <y> ring to choose an effect
level.
zz
A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3Shoot.
• Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired
results.
• Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging effect is not
shown. Review the image in Playback mode to see the effect (= 104).
• The image aging effect is not shown in movies.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
57
Cover
Still Images
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose
[ ].
2 Choose an effect level.
zz
Turn the <y> ring to choose an effect
level.
3Shoot.
• Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired
results.
Still Images
Movies
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and
below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose
[ ].
zz
A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2 Choose the area to keep in
focus.
zz
Press the <p> button.
zz
Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and turn the <7> dial to move it.
3 For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zz
Turn the <y> ring to choose the speed.
4 Return to the shooting screen
and shoot.
zz
Press the <m> button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
58
Cover
Still Images
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Speed
Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
Approx. 6 sec.
1 Choose [ ].
Approx. 3 sec.
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose
[ ].
• The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set the
zoom before shooting.
• Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired
results.
• To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the <q><r> buttons
in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the <o><p>
buttons.
• To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the <o><p>
buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical orientation, press the
<q><r> buttons.
• Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the frame.
] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [
] at an aspect
• Movie image quality is [
ratio of [ ] (= 46). These quality settings cannot be changed.
• You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the screen.
2 Choose a color tone.
zz
Turn the <y> ring to choose a color tone.
zz
A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3Shoot.
Standard
Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm
Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool
Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
• Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired
results.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
59
Cover
Still Images
Making Subjects Stand Out
(Background Defocus)
Two consecutive images are captured each time you shoot and processed
into a single image, so that the subject stands out against a blurred
background.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose
[ ].
2Shoot.
zz
Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all the
way down, the camera will shoot twice
and process the images.
zz
A blinking [ ] icon indicates that the
images could not be processed.
• Excessive camera shake or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
• For the best results with this effect, try shooting close to the subject, and
ensure ample distance between the subject and background.
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
the images.
• To adjust the effect level, turn the <y> ring.
Still Images
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose
[ ].
2 Choose an effect level.
zz
Turn the <y> ring to choose an effect
level.
zz
A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3Shoot.
• Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired
results.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
60
Still Images
Movies
Shooting in Monochrome
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose
[ ].
2 Choose a color tone.
zz
Turn the <y> ring to choose a color tone.
zz
A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3Shoot.
B/W
Black and white shots.
Sepia
Sepia tone shots.
Blue
Blue and white shots.
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Still Images
Auto Shooting after Face Detection
(Smart Shutter)
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 54) and choose [ ], and then
press the <p> button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is
displayed.
2 Aim the camera at a person.
zz
Each time the camera detects a smile, it
will shoot after the lamp lights up.
zz
To pause smile detection, press the <q>
button. Press the <q> button again to
resume detection.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera will
continue shooting each time a smile is detected.
61
Cover
• You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
• The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the camera and
open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible.
• To change the number of shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing
[ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 50) is only available for the final shot.
• You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps 1 – 2 of
] to access the setting screen,
“Specific Scenes” (= 54), touching [
].
touching [ ], and then touching the same option or [
Still Images
Using the Wink Self-Timer
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way down.
The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 54) and choose [ ], and then
press the <p> button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the <m> button.
2 Compose the shot and press
the shutter button halfway.
zz
On the screen, touch the face of the
person who will wink to choose it (Touch
AF), and then press the shutter button
halfway.
zz
Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face of the person who will
wink.
3 Press the shutter button all the
way down.
zz
The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
displayed.
zz
The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
4 Face the camera and wink.
zz
The camera will shoot about two seconds
after detecting a wink by the person
whose face is inside the frame.
zz
To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
<n> button.
• If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
• Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat, or glasses.
• Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink.
• If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
• To change the number of shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing
[ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 50) is only available for the final shot.
• If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is pressed all the way
down, the camera will shoot after a person enters the shooting area and winks.
• You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps 1 – 2 of
] to access the setting screen,
“Specific Scenes” (= 54), touching [
].
touching [ ], and then touching the same option or [
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
62
Cover
Still Images
Using the Face Self-Timer
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
(= 83). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar
shots.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 54) and choose [ ], and then
press the <p> button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the <m> button.
2 Compose the shot and press
the shutter button halfway.
zz
Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces.
3 Press the shutter button all the
way down.
zz
The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
start count down] is displayed.
zz
The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
4 Join the subjects in the
shooting area and look at the
camera.
zz
After the camera detects a new face, the
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will
speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,
the camera will shoot.
zz
To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
<n> button.
• Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the shooting area,
the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
• To change the number of shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing
[ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 50) is only available for the final shot.
• You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps 1 – 2 of
] to access the setting screen,
“Specific Scenes” (= 54), touching [
].
touching [ ], and then touching the same option or [
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
63
Cover
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
Still Images
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies
(Star Nightscape)
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in the
image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
and combines the images.
• To disable image processing that makes stars more prominent, choose MENU
► [4] tab ► [Star Emphasis] ► [Off].
• Set [Night Display] to [On] (= 92) in this mode.
• Switch to manual focus mode (= 80) to more accurately specify the focal
position before shooting.
• This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a
commercially available color-compensating filter (= 77).
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 54) and choose [ ], and then
press the <p> button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the <m> button.
2 Secure the camera.
zz
Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still and
prevent camera shake.
3Shoot.
Still Images
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in a
single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots, the
camera shoots continuously. Each shooting session lasts up to about
1.5 hours, and many shots are taken. Check the battery level and memory
card space in advance.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 54) and choose [ ], and then
press the <p> button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the <m> button.
2 Specify the duration of the
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
shooting session.
zz
Turn the <y> ring to choose the shooting
• Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.
• Under some shooting conditions, images may not look as expected.
duration.
64
Cover
3 Secure the camera.
Movies
zz
Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4Shoot.
zz
Press the shutter button all the way
down. [Busy] is displayed briefly, and
then shooting begins.
zz
Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
zz
To cancel shooting, press the shutter
button all the way down again.
• If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a
composite image created from the images up to that point is saved.
• Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
and combines the images.
• Set [Night Display] to [On] (= 92) in this mode.
• Switch to manual focus mode (= 80) to more accurately specify the focal
position before shooting.
• This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a
commercially available color-compensating filter (= 77).
Shooting Movies of Star Movement
(Star Time-Lapse Movie)
Still images are captured continuously over a specified duration and
combined to create a movie. The camera shoots once each minute, and no
sound is recorded.
Stars move quickly during playback, so you can view their movement
in a short time. Each shooting session lasts up to about two hours, and
many shots are taken. Check the battery level and memory card space in
advance.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 54) and choose [ ], and then
press the <p> button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the <m> button.
2 Specify the duration of the
shooting session.
zz
Turn the <y> ring to choose the shooting
duration.
3 Secure the camera.
zz
Mount the camera on a tripod or take
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
other measures to keep it still.
65
Cover
4 Check the brightness.
zz
Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot a single still image.
zz
Switch to Playback mode (= 103) and
check image brightness.
zz
To adjust the brightness, press the
<o> button on the shooting screen and
change the exposure level by turning the
<7> dial. Check brightness again by
taking another shot.
• If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that point
is saved.
• Maximum available shooting duration varies depending on free
space on the memory card.
• Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
the images.
• To save each shot collected before the movie is created, choose MENU ►
[4] tab ► [Save Stills] ► [On]. Note that these individual images are
managed as a single group, and during playback, only the first image is
] is displayed
displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [
in the upper left of the screen. If you erase a grouped image (= 118), all
images in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
• Set [Night Display] to [On] (= 92) in this mode.
• Switch to manual focus mode (= 80) to more accurately specify the focal
position before shooting.
• This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a
commercially available color-compensating filter (= 77).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[120']
Approx. 8 sec.
[90']
Approx. 6 sec.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
[60']
Approx. 4 sec.
Index
5Shoot.
zz
Press the movie button. [Busy] is
displayed briefly, and then shooting
begins.
zz
Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
zz
To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again.
zz
The camera operates in Eco mode
(= 159) while shooting.
Estimated Shooting and Playback Times
Session Time
Playback Time
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
66
Movies
Shooting Various Movies
Cover
2 Adjust the exposure.
zz
Turn the <7> dial to adjust the exposure,
as you watch the screen.
Shooting Movies in [E] Mode
Common Camera
Operations
3 Shoot (= 67).
1 Enter [E] mode.
zz
Set the mode dial to [E].
zz
Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
2 Configure the settings to suit
the movie (= 193 – 202).
3Shoot.
zz
Press the movie button.
zz
To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
Basic Guide
Movies
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure or change it in 1/3-stop
increments within a range of –3 to +3.
1 Lock the exposure.
zz
Press the <o> button to lock the
Advanced Guide
Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies
You can shoot fast-moving subjects for playback later in slow motion. Note
that sound is not recorded.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Set the mode dial to [E].
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [E]
in the menu, and then choose [
(= 24).
]
2 Choose a frame rate.
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [
Movies
Before Use
in the menu, and choose the desired
frame rate (= 24).
zz
The option you configured is now
displayed.
]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
exposure. The exposure shift bar is
displayed.
zz
To unlock the exposure, press the <o>
button again.
67
Cover
3 Shoot (= 67).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Time
(For a 30-sec. Clip)
Frame Rate
Image Quality
 240 fps
(320 x 240)
Approx. 4 min.
 120 fps
(640 x 480)
Approx. 2 min.
• Zooming is not available during recording, even if you move the
zoom lever.
• Focus, exposure, and color are determined when you press the
movie button.
• When you play the movie (= 104), it will be played back in slow motion.
• You can change the playback speed of movies by using the software
(= 173).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
68
4
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
P Mode
Basic Guide
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
Advanced Guide
• Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set to [G] mode.
• [G]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
• Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than [G], make sure the function is available in that mode
(= 193 – 202).
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)................ 70
Image Brightness (Exposure).......................... 70
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)..................................... 70
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure
(AE Lock)............................................................... 71
Changing the Metering Method.............................. 71
Changing the ISO Speed....................................... 72
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO NR)........................................................ 73
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)............ 74
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)............... 74
Using the ND Filter................................................. 75
Color and Continuous Shooting...................... 76
Flash................................................................... 87
Adjusting White Balance........................................ 76
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)............. 78
Continuous Shooting.............................................. 79
Changing the Flash Mode...................................... 87
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation........ 88
Shooting with the FE Lock..................................... 89
Changing the Flash Timing.................................... 89
Shooting Range and Focusing........................ 80
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro).................................. 80
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode............................ 80
Digital Tele-Converter............................................. 82
Changing the AF Frame Mode............................... 82
Changing the Focus Setting................................... 84
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)...... 85
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF).......... 86
Shooting with the AF Lock...................................... 87
Shooting RAW Images...................................... 90
Other Settings................................................... 91
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Changing the Compression Ratio
(Image Quality)....................................................... 91
Changing the IS Mode Settings............................. 91
Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen
Information............................................................. 92
69
Still Images
Movies
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1 Enter [G] mode.
zz
Set the mode dial to [G].
Cover
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –3 to +3.
zz
Press the <o> button. As you watch
2 Customize the settings as
desired (= 70 – 92), and
then shoot.
• If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the shutter button
halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. In this
case, try adjusting the ISO speed (= 72) or activating the flash (if subjects
are dark, = 87), which may enable adequate exposure.
• Movies can be recorded in [G] mode as well, by pressing the movie button.
However, some FUNC. (= 24) and MENU (= 25) settings may be
automatically adjusted for movie recording.
• For details on the shooting range in [G] mode, see “Shooting Range”
(= 206).
the screen, turn the <7> dial to adjust
brightness, and then press the <o>
button again when finished.
zz
The correction level you specified is now
displayed.
• You can also adjust the correction level by touching the right edge of the
screen while turning the <y> ring (= 98).
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
70
Cover
Still Images
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure
(AE Lock)
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
Still Images
Changing the Metering Method
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [
] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(= 2 4).
zz
The option you configured is now
displayed.
1 Lock the exposure.
zz
Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
<o> button.
zz
[ ] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
zz
To unlock AE, release the shutter button
and press the <o> button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
• AE: Auto Exposure
• After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination of shutter speed
and aperture value by turning the <7> dial (Program Shift).
Evaluative
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit shots.
Automatically adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions.
Determines the average brightness of light across the entire
Center
image area, calculated by treating brightness in the central area
Weighted Avg.
as more important.
Spot
Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point frame). You
can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame (= 72).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
71
Cover
Still Images
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
zz
Turn the <y> ring to choose the ISO
1 Set the metering method to [ ].
speed.
zz
Follow the steps in “Changing the
zz
The option you configured is now
Metering Method” (= 71) to choose
[ ].
displayed.
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose
[Spot AE Point] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [AF Point] (= 25).
zz
The Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
(= 83).
• Not available when [AF Frame] is set to [Face AiAF] (= 83).
Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the
shooting mode and conditions.
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Low For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at
twilight.
 
 
 
High For shooting night scenes, or in dark
rooms.
• To view the automatically set ISO speed when the camera is set to [ ], press
the shutter button halfway.
• Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image graininess, there
may be a greater risk of subject blurriness in some shooting conditions.
• Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which may reduce
subject blurriness and increase the flash range. However, shots may look
grainy.
• You can also set the ISO speed by pressing the <m> button, choosing [ ],
choosing an option (either by pressing the <q><r> buttons or turning the
<7> dial), and then pressing the <m> button. To specify [ ], press the < >
button on the setting screen.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
72
Cover
Still Images
Adjusting the
Setting
When the camera is set to [ ], maximum ISO speed can be specified in
a range of [ ] – [ ], and sensitivity can be specified in a range of three
levels.
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO NR)
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [High
1 Access the setting screen.
ISO NR] on the [4] tab, and then choose
the desired option (= 25).
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [ISO
Auto Settings] on the [4] tab, and then
press the <m> button (= 25).
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Choose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (= 26).
• You can also access the [ISO Auto Settings] screen when choosing the ISO
speed in the FUNC. menu, by pressing the <n> button.
• Not available with [
] or [
] (= 90).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
73
Cover
Still Images
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each time
you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and overexposure
(relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
• To access the setting screen in step 2, you can either touch [
] on
] on the exposure compensation screen
the screen in step 1 or touch [
(= 70).
• You can also configure this setting by touching or dragging the bar on the
].
setting screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching [
Still Images
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Press the <m> button, choose
[ ] in the menu, and then choose [
(= 24).
]
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <
> button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the <q><r>
buttons or turning the <7> dial.
• AEB shooting is only available in [!] mode (= 88).
• Continuous shooting (= 79) is not available in this mode.
• If exposure compensation is already in use (= 70), the value specified for
that function is treated as the standard exposure level for this function.
• You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing the <n>
button when the exposure compensation screen (= 70) is displayed.
• Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [$] (= 39).
• In [Blink Detection] mode (= 50), this function is only available for the final
shot.
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal
brightness.
To avoid washed-out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To
preserve image detail in shadows, specify Shadow Correct.
• Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
may cause images to appear grainy.
• You can also correct existing images (= 126).
• You can customize camera operation so that turning the <y> ring adjusts DR
Correction or Shadow Correct settings (= 96).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
74
Cover
Still Images
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)
Still Images
Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows.
Basic Guide
zz
Press the <m> button, choose
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [
] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(= 24).
Available ISO Speed
(= 72)
Details
Common Camera
Operations
Shadow Correct
Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out, as
follows.
Option
Before Use
–
Automatic adjustment to prevent washed-out
highlights
[
], [
]–[
]
Tone down highlights by about 200% relative
].
to the brightness level of [
[
], [
]–[
]
Tone down highlights by about 400% relative
].
to the brightness level of [
[
], [
]–[
]
• ISO speed (= 72) will be adjusted to a speed within the
supported range if you have specified a value outside the supported
range indicated here.
] in the menu, and then choose [
[
(= 24).
zz
Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
]
Using the ND Filter
To shoot at slower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values, use the ND
filter, which reduces light intensity to 1/8 the actual level (equivalent to 3 stops).
zz
Press the <m> button, choose
[ ] in the menu, and then choose [
(= 24).
]
• Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still
and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode]
to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera
(= 91).
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• ND: Neutral Density
75
Cover
Color and Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Still Images
Movies
Adjusting White Balance
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(= 24).
zz
The option you configured is now
displayed.
h
S
 
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the shooting
conditions.
Day Light
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Cloudy
For shooting in cloudy conditions, in the shade, or at twilight.
Tungsten
For shooting under ordinary incandescent (tungsten) lighting
and similarly colored fluorescent lighting.
Fluorescent
For shooting under warm-white (or similarly colored) or coolwhite fluorescent lighting.
Fluorescent H
For shooting under daylight fluorescent and similarly colored
fluorescent lighting.
Flash
For shooting with the flash.
Underwater
Sets the optimal white balance for shooting underwater. Tones
down blues to produce natural-looking colors overall.
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance (= 76).
Movies
Custom White Balance
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zz
Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (= 76) to choose [ ] or [ ].
zz
Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
the < > button.
zz
The tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
• Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
• You can also record white balance data on the screen above by
].
touching [
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
76
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Manually Correcting White Balance
You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or colorcompensating filter.
• B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
• You can customize camera operation so that the B and A adjustment screen
can be accessed simply by turning the <y> ring (= 96).
• One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7 mireds on a color
temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Color temperature unit representing color
temperature conversion filter density)
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Configure the setting.
zz
Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (= 76) to choose the white
balance option.
zz
Turn the <y> ring to adjust the correction
level for B and A.
zz
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
2 Configure advanced settings.
zz
To configure more advanced settings,
press the <n> button and adjust
the correction level by turning the
<y> ring or <7> dial or pressing the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
zz
To reset the correction level, press the
< > button.
zz
Press the <n> button to complete
the setting.
• You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging the bar in
step 1 or the frame in step 2.
] in step 1.
• You can also access the screen in step 2 by touching [
] to restore the original level and
• On the screen in step 2, you can touch [
] to return to the shooting screen.
touch [
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if you
switch to another white balance option in step 1, but correction
levels will be reset if you record custom white balance data.
77
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
• White balance (= 76) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.
• With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone may
change. These settings may not produce the expected results with
some skin tones.
Movies
Custom Color
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
1 Access the setting screen.
–
My Colors Off
Vivid
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation, making images
sharper.
Neutral
Tones down contrast and color saturation for subdued images.
Sepia
Creates sepia tone images.
B/W
Creates black and white images.
Positive Film
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, and Vivid
Red to produce intense yet natural-looking colors resembling
images on positive film.
Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.
Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.
Vivid Blue
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky, ocean, and other
blue subjects more vivid.
Vivid Green
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains, foliage, and
other green subjects more vivid.
Vivid Red
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red subjects more vivid.
Custom Color
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and other
qualities as desired (= 78).
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Still Images
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [
] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(= 24).
zz
The option you configured is now
displayed.
Before Use
zz
Follow the steps in “Changing Image
Color Tones (My Colors)” (= 78) to
choose [ ], and then press the < >
button.
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose
an option, and then specify the value by
pressing the <q><r> buttons or turning
the <7> dial.
zz
For stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
zz
Press the < > button to complete the
setting.
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• You can also specify a value by touching or dragging the bar.
78
Cover
Still Images
Continuous Shooting
Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting
Speed” (= 206).
1 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [
] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(= 24).
zz
The option you configured is now
displayed.
2Shoot.
zz
Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
Mode
W Continuous
Continuous
Shooting AF*
Description
Continuous shooting, with the focus and exposure determined
when you press the shutter button halfway.
Continuous shooting and focusing.
[AF Frame] is set to [1-point] and cannot be changed.
*In [t] mode (= 55), manual focus mode (= 80), or when AF is locked
(= 87), [ ] is changed to [ ].
• Cannot be used with the self-timer (= 38) or [Blink Detection]
(= 50).
• Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
• As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
• Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.
• With Touch Shutter (= 39), the camera will only take one shot
instead of shooting continuously.
• When using Face ID (= 41), the location in the image where the name is
recorded will be determined in the first shot, and will be recorded in the same
place for further shots.
Images Displayed during Playback
Each set of images shot continuously in [G], [M], [B], or [D] mode is
managed as a single group, and only the first image in that group will be
displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [
] is displayed
in the upper left of the screen.
• If you erase a grouped image (= 118), all images in the group are
also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
• Grouped images can be played back individually (= 111) and ungrouped
(= 112).
• Protecting (= 116) a grouped image will protect all images in the group.
• Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back using Image
Search (= 109) or Smart Shuffle (= 115). In this case, images are
temporarily ungrouped.
• These actions are not available for grouped images: editing Face ID
information (= 112), magnifying (= 113), tagging as favorites (= 121),
editing (= 124 – 127), printing (= 176), setting up individual image printing
(= 180), or adding to a photobook (= 182). To do these things, either view
grouped images individually (= 111) or cancel grouping (= 112) first.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
79
Cover
Shooting Range and Focusing
Still Images
Movies
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [e]. For
details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range” (= 206).
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button halfway
to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the position you
specified. For details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range” (= 206).
1 Choose [f].
zz
Press the <q> button, choose [e] (either
zz
Press the <q> button, choose [f]
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
zz
Once the setting is complete, [e] is
displayed.
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
zz
[f] and the MF indicator are displayed.
2 Specify the general focal
• If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
• With the AF frame mode set to [Face AiAF], using Touch Shutter
returns the camera to [ ].
position.
zz
Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
• To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod and shooting
with the camera set to [[] (= 38).
• You can also configure this setting by pressing the <q> button, touching [e],
and then touching it again.
MF Indicator
bar (which shows the distance and focal
position) and the magnified display area,
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to specify the general focal
position, and then press the <m> button.
zz
To adjust the magnification, press the
<r> button.
zz
Move the focusing frame as needed
(= 83).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
3 Fine-tune the focus.
zz
Press the shutter button halfway to have
the camera fine-tune the focal position
(Safety MF).
80
Cover
• When you focus manually, the AF frame mode (= 82) is [1-point]
and AF frame size (= 83) is [Normal], and these settings cannot
be changed.
• Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (= 36) or digital
tele-converter (= 82), or when using a TV as a display (= 172),
but the magnified display will not appear.
• You can also adjust the focus by turning the <y> ring (= 96).
• To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to stabilize it.
• To hide or enlarge the magnified display area, press the <n> button and
adjust the [MF-Point Zoom] settings on the [4] tab as needed (= 25).
• To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, press the <n> button and set [Safety MF] on the [4] tab to [Off]
Still Images
Before Use
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
first one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specified focus can be set in three levels.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Press the <m> button, choose
[ ] in the menu, and then choose [
(= 24).
]
(= 25).
Still Images
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge detection
as needed.
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <
> button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the <q><r>
buttons or turning the <7> dial.
1 Access the setting screen.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [4] tab, and
then choose [On] (= 25).
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Choose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (= 26).
• Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
• Focus bracketing is only available in [!] mode (= 88).
• Continuous shooting (= 79) is not available in this mode.
• You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the <n>
button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode” (= 80).
• Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [$] (= 39).
• In [Blink Detection] mode (= 50), this function is only available for the final
shot.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
81
Cover
Still Images
• To access the screen in step 2, you can either touch [
] on the screen
] on the manual focus screen (= 80).
in step 1 or touch [
• You can also configure this setting by touching or dragging the bar on the
].
screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching [
Still Images
Movies
Changing the AF Frame Mode
Before Use
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as
follows.
Movies
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [AF
Digital Tele-Converter
Frame] on the [4] tab, and then choose
the desired option (= 25).
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.5x or 2.0x.
This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster than it
would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the same zoom
factor.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [4] tab, and then
choose the desired option (= 25).
zz
The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
• The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom
(= 36) or AF-point zoom (= 49).
• The respective focal lengths when using [1.5x] and [2.0x] are 36.0 – 180.0 mm
and 48.0 – 240.0 mm (35mm film equivalent).
• The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom lever all the
way toward <i> for maximum telephoto, and when you zoom in to enlarge
the subject to the same size following step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects
(Digital Zoom)” (= 36).
Still Images
Movies
1-point
One AF frame is displayed. Effective for reliable focusing.
• A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus
when you press the shutter button halfway. Note that AF-point
zooming (= 49) is not possible.
• To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or in a corner,
first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF frame, and then hold
the shutter button halfway down. As you continue to hold the shutter button
halfway, recompose the shot as desired, and then press the shutter button all
the way down (Focus Lock).
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
82
Cover
Still Images
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point)
• On the screen in step 1, you can also restore the AF frame to the original
], or exit the setting by touching [
].
position by touching [
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
frame mode to [1-point].
Still Images
Movies
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Move the AF frame.
zz
Touch the screen. An AF frame is
displayed in orange where you touched
(Touch AF).
zz
You can turn the <7> dial to move the AF
frame and press the <o><p><q><r>
buttons to fine-tune the position.
zz
To return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, press the <n>
button.
2 Resize the AF frame.
zz
To reduce the AF frame size, turn the
<y> ring. Turn it again to restore it to the
original size.
3 Finish the setup process.
zz
Press the <m> button.
• AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
zoom (= 36) or digital tele-converter (= 82), and in manual
focus mode (= 80).
• You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame (= 72).
• You can also configure the AF frame size by pressing the <n> button and
choosing [AF Frame Size] on the [4] tab.
Face AiAF
• Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
• After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected
faces.
• When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving subjects,
within a certain range.
• After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
• If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
(without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in the
areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
• If faces are not detected when Servo AF (= 84) is set to [On], the
AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press
the shutter button halfway.
• Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
-Subjects that are distant or extremely close
-Subjects that are dark or light
-Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden
• The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
• No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
83
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Changing the Focus Setting
Shooting with Servo AF
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1 Configure the setting.
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed. Instead,
you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button
halfway.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose
zz
Press the <n> button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [Off] (= 25).
[Servo AF] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [On] (= 25).
2Focus.
zz
The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
• Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
• In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway. In this
case, the focus and exposure are set according to the specified AF
frame mode.
• If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and
aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter button,
and then press it halfway again.
• AF lock shooting is not available.
• [AF-Point Zoom] on the [4] tab is not available.
• Not available when using the self-timer (= 38).
On
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because the camera
constantly focuses on subjects until you press the shutter button halfway.
Off
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus constantly.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
84
Cover
Still Images
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
You can shoot after choosing a specific person’s face to focus on.
1 Prepare the camera for Face
4Shoot.
zz
Press the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [
] changes to [
].
zz
Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Select.
zz
Set the AF frame to [Face AiAF]
(= 83).
zz
Assign [
] to the <
> button (= 99).
2 Enter Face Select mode.
zz
Aim the camera at the person’s face and
press the <
> button.
zz
After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [ ] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
zz
Even if the subject moves, the face frame
[ ] follows the subject within a certain
range.
zz
If a face is not detected, [ ] is not
displayed.
3 Choose the face to focus on.
zz
To switch the face frame [
] to another
detected face, press the < > button.
zz
After you have switched the face frame
to all detected faces, [Face Select : Off]
is displayed, and the specified AF frame
mode screen is displayed again.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• When [Face ID] is set to [On], names of any registered people detected are
not displayed when you have selected another, unregistered face to focus on.
However, their names will be recorded in the still images (= 41).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
85
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus on.
1 Set the AF frame to [Face AiAF]
(= 83).
2 Choose a person’s face or
another subject to focus on.
zz
Touch the subject or person on the
screen.
zz
When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Focus is
maintained even if the subject moves.
zz
To cancel Touch AF, touch [^].
3Shoot.
zz
Press the shutter button halfway. After
the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a
green [ ].
zz
Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
• If you prefer the camera not to shoot when you touch the screen,
make sure [Touch Shutter] mode is deactivated. Press the <n>
button, choose [Touch Shutter] on the [4] tab, and then choose
[Off] (= 25).
• Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move
too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between subjects
and the background.
• Even if you are shooting in [e] mode (= 80), the camera will
revert to [ ] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to
focus.
• If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered
people are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still
images (= 41). However, a name will display if the subject
chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected with Face ID.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
86
Still Images
Movies
Shooting with the AF Lock
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will not
change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.
1 Lock the focus.
zz
With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the <q> button.
Cover
Flash
Before Use
Still Images
Changing the Flash Mode
You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details on
the flash range, see “Flash Range” (= 206).
1 Raise the flash.
zz
Move the <h> switch.
zz
The focus is now locked, and [f] and
the MF indicator are displayed.
zz
To unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the <q>
button again.
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
• Cannot be used with Touch Shutter (= 39).
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <r> button, choose a flash
mode (either press the <q><r> buttons
or turn the <7> dial), and then press the
<m> button.
zz
The option you configured is now
displayed.
• The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the <r> button
when the flash is lowered. Move the <h> switch to raise the flash,
then configure the setting.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
87
Cover
Still Images
[ ] Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
[h] On
Fires for each shot.
[Z] Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.
• In [Z] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures
to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should
set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (= 91).
• In [Z] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main subject
does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing.
[!] Off
For shooting without the flash.
• If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter button
halfway in low-light conditions, mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
• Adjustment is also possible by pressing the <r> button, touching the desired
option, and then touching it again.
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Just as with regular exposure compensation (= 70), you can adjust the
flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
zz
Raise the flash, press the <r> button and
immediately turn the <y> ring to choose
the compensation level, and then press
the <m> button.
zz
The correction level you specified is now
displayed.
• When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically adjusts the
shutter speed or aperture value during the flash shots to reduce washedout highlights and shoot at optimal exposure. However, you can deactivate
automatic adjustment of the shutter speed and aperture value by accessing
MENU (= 25) and choosing [4] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Safety FE] ►
[Off].
• You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by accessing MENU
(= 25) and choosing [4] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].
• You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (= 25) when the
flash is up by pressing the <r> button and immediately pressing the <n>
button.
• You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (= 25) by pressing
].
the <r> button and touching [
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
88
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Shooting with the FE Lock
Changing the Flash Timing
Just as with the AE lock (= 71), you can lock the exposure for the flash
shots.
Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows.
1 Access the setting screen.
1 Raise the flash and set it to [h]
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [Flash
(= 87).
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press
the <m> button (= 25).
2 Lock the flash exposure.
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
<o> button.
zz
The flash fires, and when
[ ] is displayed, the flash output level is
retained.
zz
To unlock FE, release the shutter button
and press the <o> button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
3 Compose the shot and shoot.
zz
After one shot, FE is unlocked and [
no longer displayed.
• FE Lock cannot be used with Touch Shutter (= 39) or Touch AF
(= 86), because touching the screen will cancel FE Lock.
] is
zz
Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
the desired option (= 26).
1st-curtain
The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens.
2nd-curtain
The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• FE: Flash Exposure
89
Cover
Still Images
Shooting RAW Images
RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no
loss of image quality from the camera’s internal image processing. Use
Digital Photo Professional (= 173) to adjust RAW images as desired with
minimal loss of image quality.
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [
] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(= 24).
Records JPEG images. JPEG images are processed in the camera for optimal
image quality and compressed to reduce file size. However, the compression
process is irreversible, and images cannot be restored to their original,
unprocessed state. Image processing may also cause some loss of image
quality.
Records RAW images. RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with
essentially no loss of image quality from the camera’s image processing. The
data cannot be used in this state for viewing on a computer or printing. You must
first use the software (Digital Photo Professional) to convert images to ordinary
JPEG or TIFF files. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of image quality.
For details on resolution and the number of shots that will fit on a card, see
“Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” (= 205).
Records two images, both a RAW image and a JPEG image, for each shot.
The JPEG image can be viewed on a computer or printed without using the
software.
• When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
software (= 173).
• Digital zoom (= 36), date stamps (= 40), and red-eye
reduction (= 47) are set to [Off] in [ ] and [ ] modes.
Additionally, noise reduction level (= 73), i-Contrast (= 74)
and My Colors (= 78) cannot be configured.
• The file extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
90
Cover
Other Settings
Still Images
Movies
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
1 Access the setting screen.
Changing the Compression Ratio
(Image Quality)
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press
the <m> button (= 25).
Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as
follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can fit
on a memory card, see “Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” (= 205).
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [IS Mode]. Press the
<q><r> buttons to choose the desired
option (= 26).
zz
Press the <m> button, choose [
] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(= 24).
Continuous
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
applied (Intelligent IS) (= 35).
Shoot Only*
Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting.
Off
Deactivates image stabilization.
*The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.
• If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
91
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting
During movie recording, a smaller image display area is shown, with the
subject enlarged, as a measure when correcting other distortion such as
rotational camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
shooting, you can disable this image stabilization.
zz
Follow the steps in “Changing the IS
Mode Settings” (= 91) to access the
[IS Settings] screen.
zz
Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[2] (= 35).
Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen
Information
Information displayed on the shooting screen and menus can be changed to
a color suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting
is useful in modes such as [ ] (= 64).
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [Night
Display] on the [4] tab, and then choose
[On] (= 25).
• The color is not adjusted in Playback mode.
• You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded at
the same size shown before shooting.
Movies
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
92
5
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Basic Guide
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for your shooting style
• Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective mode.
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)............... 94
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)............. 94
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values
([M] Mode)......................................................... 95
Adjusting the Flash Output..................................... 96
Customization for Shooting Styles................. 96
Changing Control Ring Settings............................. 96
Using the Control Ring for Adjustment................... 98
Customizing Display Information............................ 98
Convenient Control Using the < > or
Movie Button.......................................................... 99
Customizing the FUNC. Menu
(FUNC. Menu Layout).................................... 100
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu................ 100
Saving Shooting Settings..................................... 101
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)............................................................ 102
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
93
Cover
Still Images
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter Speed” (= 207).
1 Enter [M] mode.
zz
Set the mode dial to [M].
2 Set the shutter speed.
zz
Turn the <y> ring to set the shutter speed.
Still Images
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Aperture” (= 207).
1 Enter [B] mode.
zz
Set the mode dial to [B].
2 Set the aperture value.
zz
Turn the <y> ring to set the aperture
value.
Shutter Speed (sec.)
Available ISO Speed (= 72)
15 – 1.3
[
], [
]–[
]
1 – 1/2500
[
], [
]–[
]
• With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, there will be a delay
before you can shoot again, as images are processed to remove noise.
• When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set [IS
Mode] to [Off] (= 91).
• The speed you set may be lowered automatically as needed if the
flash fires.
• Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (= 94).
• Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.
• [M]: Time value
• You can customize camera operation so that turning the <7> dial changes the
shutter speed (= 96).
• Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter button
halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure.
Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is displayed in
white, or use safety shift (see below).
• [B]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the lens)
• To avoid exposure problems in [M] and [B] modes, you can have the
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed or aperture value, even when
standard exposure cannot otherwise be obtained. Press the <n> button
and set [Safety Shift] on the [4] tab to [On] (= 25).
However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.
• You can customize camera operation so that turning the <7> dial changes the
aperture value (= 96).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
94
Cover
Still Images
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed and
aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Shutter
Speed” (= 207) and “Aperture” (= 207).
1 Enter [D] mode.
zz
Set the mode dial to [D].
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Turn the <7> dial to set the shutter
Aperture Value
Shutter Speed
Standard
Exposure Level
speed, and turn the <y> ring to set the
aperture value.
zz
An exposure level mark based on your
specified value is shown on the exposure
level indicator for comparison to the
standard exposure level.
zz
The exposure level mark is shown in
orange when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 2 stops.
Exposure Level
Indicator
Exposure Level
Mark
• After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure level
may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
• Screen brightness may change depending on your specified shutter
speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness remains the
same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [h].
• To have the setting you did not configure in step 2 (whether shutter
speed or aperture value) automatically adjusted to obtain standard
exposure, hold the shutter button halfway and press the <o>
button. Note that standard exposure may not be possible with some
settings.
• Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.
• [D]: Manual
• Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specified metering method
(= 71).
• You can customize camera operation so that turning the <y> ring adjusts the
shutter speed and turning the <7> dial adjusts the aperture value (= 96).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shutter Speed (sec.)
Available ISO Speed (= 72)
250 – 40
[
]
30 – 1.3
[
]–[
]
1 – 1/2500
[
]–[
]
95
Still Images
Adjusting the Flash Output
Choose from the three flash levels in [D] mode.
1 Raise the flash.
zz
Move the <h> switch.
2 Enter [D] mode.
zz
Set the mode dial to [D].
3 Configure the setting.
Customization for Shooting Styles
Still Images
Movies
Changing Control Ring Settings
Reassign control ring functions as follows. Using the control ring is an
enjoyable way to control the camera as you would a fully manual camera.
1 Choose a function to assign to
the <y> ring.
zz
Press the <
> button.
zz
Press the <r> button and immediately
turn the <y> ring to choose the flash
level, and then press the <m> button.
zz
Once the setting is complete, the flash
output level is displayed.
]: low, [
]: medium, [
]: high
[
• You can also set the flash level by accessing MENU (= 25) and choosing
[4] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Output].
• You can set the flash level in [M] or [B] mode by accessing MENU
(= 25) and choosing [4] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Mode] ►
[Manual].
• You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen by pressing the <r>
button and then the <n> button.
• You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen by pressing the <r>
].
button and touching [
zz
Choose an option, either by pressing the
< > or <q><r> buttons or by turning
the <y> ring or <7> dial.
zz
Press the <m> button to complete the
setting.
2 Configure the assigned
function.
zz
Turn the <y> ring or the <7> dial to
configure the assigned function.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• You can also configure this setting by pressing the <
option to choose it, and then touching it again.
> button, touching an
96
Cover
Functions Assignable to the Control Ring
Functions you can assign to the control ring vary depending on shooting
mode, and those assignments determine which functions you can assign to
the control dial.
Shooting
Mode
Assignable
Function
b
f
• Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in the current
shooting mode or under current function conditions.
], [K], or movie mode
• The <y> ring can be used for step zooming in [
(= 37).
B
M
Movies
G
Advanced Guide
Assigning Functions to the Control Ring
y
Av
Av
Tv
ISO
7
Tv
–
–
–
y
ISO
ISO
ISO
ISO
7
Tv, Av*
Av
Tv
–
y
Tv
+/–
+/–
+/–
7
Av
Av
Tv
–
Assign functions to the control ring based on each shooting mode.
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Following step 1 in “Changing Control
Ring Settings” (= 96), choose [
and press the <n> button.
]
2 Configure the setting.
y
Manual focusing is possible (= 80).
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
y
White balance can be corrected (= 76).
y
Step zooming is possible (= 37).
y
Dynamic range correction can be configured (= 75).
y
Shadow correction can be enabled or disabled (= 75).
y
The aspect ratio can be changed (= 46).
–
Functions can be assigned as desired (= 97).
<7> dial to choose the shooting mode
with functions to assign.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<y> ring to choose a function to assign to
the control ring.
zz
Functions you can assign to the control
dial will be updated automatically.
zz
Press the <n> button to return to the
shooting screen.
•+/–: exposure compensation (= 70); ISO: ISO speed (= 72); MF: manual focus
(= 80); Tv: shutter speed (= 94); Av: aperture value (= 94).
], [ ], [ ] or [ ], to the <
> button, the
•When you assign [f], [ ], [
functions you can assign to the <7> dial are the same as for [ ].
*Tv and Av settings can be toggled by pressing the <o> button.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Still Images
D
Before Use
Functions You Can Assign to
the Control Ring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• You can also access the setting screen by choosing [ ] and touching [
]
in step 1 of “Changing Control Ring Settings” (= 96).
• On the setting screen, you can also configure the functions assigned to the
].
control ring by touching the functions and then [
97
Cover
Still Images
Using the Control Ring for Adjustment
Still Images
Movies
Customizing Display Information
You can turn the control ring for instant adjustment of ISO speed, exposure
compensation, shutter speed, and aperture value, as you touch the screen
to switch between these items.
Set the number of custom displays (= 24) and what information is
displayed in each display when the <p> button is pressed in shooting
screen.
1 Access the setting screen.
zz
Touch the right edge (outlined at left) to
zz
Press the <n> button, choose
view menu items, drag up or down to
choose an item, and turn the <y> ring to
specify a value.
[Custom Display] on the [4] tab, and
then press the <m> button (= 25).
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose an item, and
then press the <m> button. Items you
choose for display are labeled with [ ].
zz
Selected items (labeled with a [ ]) will
be included in display.
Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Note that the functions
assigned to the control ring (= 96) are not displayed.
D
B
M
G
ISO
Tv
Av
ISO
+/–
Av
ISO
+/–
Tv
ISO
+/–
Shooting Info Displays shooting information (= 191).
Grid Lines
Displays a reference grid.
Electronic
Level
Displays the electronic level (= 49).
Histogram
Displays a histogram (= 106) in [G], [M], [B], and [D] modes.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
•+/–: exposure compensation (= 70); ISO: ISO speed (= 72); Tv: shutter speed
(= 94); Av: aperture value (= 94).
98
• Settings will not be saved if you press the shutter button halfway
and return to the shooting screen from the custom display settings
screen.
• Grayed-out items can also be specified, but they may not be
displayed in some shooting modes.
• Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.
• You can also choose an item to display by touching it.
Still Images
Convenient Control Using the <
Button
Movies
> or Movie
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the <
movie button.
> or
1 Access the setting screen.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose
button] or [Set
button] on the
[Set
[4] tab, and then press the <m> button
(= 25).
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
3 Use the assigned function as
needed.
zz
To activate an assigned function, press
the button you assigned it to.
• To restore default settings, choose [ ] in [Set
button] or [ ] in
button].
[Set
• Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in the current
shooting mode or under current function conditions.
], you can move and resize the AF frame by pressing the < >
• With [
button in [1-point] AF frame mode (= 83).
• With [ ] or [ ], each press of the assigned button records white balance data
(= 76), and the white balance setting changes to [ ] or [ ].
• With [%], each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks the focus. [%]
is then displayed.
• With [ ], pressing the assigned button deactivates screen display.
-Press any button (other than the power button)
-Hold the camera in another orientation
-Raise or lower the flash
• You can still record movies in [ ], [E] or [ ] mode even if you assign a
function to the movie button.
• You can also configure settings by touching a desired option and then touching
].
it again or touching [
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
turn the <7> dial to choose a function to
assign, and then press the <m> button.
99
3 Configure the setting.
Customizing the FUNC. Menu
(FUNC. Menu Layout)
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [OK]
The display of FUNC. menu items can be customized. Functions not shown
on this menu will be available on the [4] tab of the menu screen.
Still Images
Movies
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
1 Access the setting screen.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose
[FUNC. Menu Layout] on the [4]
tab, and then press the <m> button
(= 25).
2 Choose icons to include in the
menu.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons
or turn the <7> dial and then press the
<m> button to choose icons to include
in the FUNC. menu. Selected icons are
marked with a [ ].
zz
Selected items (labeled with a [ ]) will be
included in display.
zz
Items without a [ ] will be available on
the [4] tab of the menu screen.
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
• The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the <m> button
when the FUNC. menu is displayed.
• Items removed from the FUNC. menu can be added to My Menu (= 102);
adding them to the FUNC. menu again automatically removes them from My
Menu.
Rearranging Menu Items
1 Access the setting screen.
zz
On the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
Items to Include in the Menu” (= 100),
press the < > button.
zz
Press the <m> or <r> button to choose
an icon to move. Press the <o><p>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose
the new position, and then press the
<m> or <q> button.
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [OK]
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
100
Cover
Still Images
Saving Shooting Settings
Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function settings
for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode dial to [ ].
Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch shooting modes or
turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be retained this way.
Settings that can be saved
• Shooting modes ([G], [M], [B], and [D])
• Items set in [G], [M], [B], or [D] modes (= 70 – 96)
• Shooting menu settings
3 Save the settings.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
• Manual focus positions (= 80)
• My Menu settings (= 102)
1 Enter a shooting mode with
settings you want to save, and
change the settings as desired.
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [Save
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press
the <m> button.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ],
change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting
details are not applied in other shooting modes.
• To clear information you have saved to [ ] and restore default values, turn the
mode dial to [ ] and choose [Reset All] (= 165).
• Zoom positions
Before Use
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
101
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
You can save up to five commonly used shooting menu items on the [ ]
tab. By customizing the [ ] tab, you can access to these items quickly from
a single screen.
1 Access the setting screen.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [My
Menu settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the <m> button (= 25).
2 Configure the setting.
3 Rearrange menu items, as
needed.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Sort], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
Choose a menu item to move (either
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to change the order, and then
press the <m> button.
zz
Press the <n> button.
• Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specified, but they may not
be available in some shooting modes.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Select items], and
then press the <m> button.
zz
Choose up to five menu items to save
(either press the <o><p> buttons or
turn the <7> dial), and then press the
<m> button.
zz
[ ] is displayed.
zz
To cancel saving, press the <m> button.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
zz
Press the <n> button.
• To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the <n> button in
Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] and press the <q><r> buttons to
choose [Yes].
• On the [Select items] screen for saving or clearing items, you can also touch
items to select them.
• On the [Sort] screen, you can also drag items to change the display order.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
102
6
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Playback Mode
Basic Guide
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways
Advanced Guide
• To prepare the camera for these operations, press the <1> button to enter Playback mode.
• It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from
other cameras.
Viewing............................................................. 104
Switching Display Modes..................................... 106
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)................................. 107
Checking People Detected in Face ID................. 108
Browsing and Filtering Images...................... 108
Navigating through Images in an Index............... 108
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions... 109
Using the Control Ring to Jump............................111
Viewing Individual Images in a Group...................111
Viewing Slideshows............................................. 114
Auto Playback of Related Images
(Smart Shuffle)..................................................... 115
Convenient Control: Touch Actions.............. 122
Protecting Images........................................... 116
Editing Still Images......................................... 124
Choosing a Selection Method.............................. 116
Choosing Images Individually.............................. 116
Selecting a Range................................................ 117
Specifying All Images at Once............................. 118
Erasing Images................................................ 118
Resizing Images................................................... 124
Cropping............................................................... 125
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)........... 125
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)............. 126
Correcting Red-Eye.............................................. 127
Using a Function Assigned to [ ]....................... 122
Changing Touch Actions Functions...................... 123
Erasing Multiple Images at Once......................... 119
Editing Movies................................................. 128
Editing Face ID Information........................... 112
Image Viewing Options................................... 113
Rotating Images.............................................. 120
Reducing File Sizes............................................. 129
Editing Digest Movies........................................... 129
Magnifying Images............................................... 113
Tagging Images as Favorites......................... 121
Deactivating Auto Rotation................................... 121
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
103
Cover
Still Images
Movies
zz
Movies are identified by a [
Viewing
] icon. To
play movies, go to step 3.
Common Camera
Operations
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
Basic Guide
1 Enter Playback mode.
Advanced Guide
zz
Press the <1> button.
zz
Your last shot is displayed.
3 Play movies.
zz
To start playback, press the <m> button
to access the movie control panel,
choose [ ] (either press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button again.
2 Browse through your images.
zz
To view the previous image, press
the <q> button or turn the <7> dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the <r> button or turn the
<7> dial clockwise.
zz
Press and hold the <q><r> buttons to
browse through images quickly. Images
appear grainy at this time.
4 Adjust the volume.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons to adjust the
volume.
zz
To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator is no longer displayed, press the
<o><p> buttons.
Volume Indicator
zz
To access Scroll Display mode, turn the
<7> dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the
<7> dial to browse through images.
zz
To return to single-image display, press
the <m> button.
zz
To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the <o><p> buttons in
Scroll Display mode.
Before Use
5 Pause playback.
zz
To pause or resume playback, press the
<m> button.
zz
After the movie is finished, [
displayed.
] is
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
104
Cover
• To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
halfway.
• To deactivate Scroll Display, press the <n> button, choose [Scroll
Display] on the [1] tab, and then choose [Off].
• If you prefer to have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, press the <n> button, and on the [1] tab, choose [Resume] and
then [Last shot].
• To change the transition shown between images, press the <n> button,
choose [Transition Effect] on the [1] tab, and then choose the desired effect.
Touch-Screen Operations
zz
To view the next image, drag left across
the screen, and to view the previous
image, drag right.
zz
To access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
zz
You can also choose images in Scroll
Display mode by dragging left or right.
zz
Touching the central image will restore
single-image display.
zz
To browse images grouped by shooting
date in Scroll Display mode, drag up or
down.
zz
To start playback, touch [
] in step 3 of
“Viewing” (= 104).
zz
To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
zz
To stop playback, touch the screen. The
screen shown at left is displayed, and the
following operations are available.
zz
Touch [ ] to display the volume
panel, and then touch [o][p] to adjust
the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is
displayed.
zz
To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or
drag left or right.
zz
To resume playback, touch [ ].
zz
Touch [^] to return to the screen in step
2 of “Viewing” (= 104).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
105
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Switching Display Modes
Still Images
Press the <p> button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback
(Detailed Information Display)” (= 192).
High
Dark
Simple
Information
Display
Detailed
Information
Display
RGB Histogram,
GPS Information
Display
Still Images
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed
information display (= 106).
Bright
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Histogram
Low
No Information
Display
Movies
zz
The graph in detailed information display
(= 106) is a histogram showing the
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
zz
The histogram can also be accessed
while shooting (= 98, 191).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
106
Cover
Movies
Still Images
Movies
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
zz
The RGB histogram shows the
distribution of shades of red, green, and
blue in an image. The horizontal axis
represents R, G, or B brightness, and the
vertical axis, how much of the image is
at that level of brightness. Viewing this
histogram enables you to check image
color characteristics.
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
View digest movies recorded automatically in [
of still image shooting as follows.
] mode (= 32) on a day
Advanced Guide
]
and press the <m> button.
zz
Using a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
(= 153). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
zz
Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
• [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available on
your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
• UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as Greenwich Mean
Time
• GPS information display is not available for images that lack this information.
2 Play the movie.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK].
zz
The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
• After a moment, [
] will no longer be displayed when you are using the
camera with information display deactivated (= 106).
• You can also play digest movies by touching [
and touching [OK] on the screen in step 2.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Choose an image.
zz
Choose a still image labeled with [
Before Use
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
] on the screen in step 1
Index
• You can also switch between the RGB histogram (still images only) and
GPS information display by dragging the lower half of the screen upward or
downward in detailed information display.
107
Cover
Browsing and Filtering Images
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
Navigating through Images in an Index
1 Choose a movie.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [1] tab, and
then choose a date (= 25).
2 Play the movie.
zz
Press the <m> button to start playback.
Still Images
Checking People Detected in Face ID
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (= 106), the
names of up to five detected people registered in Face ID (= 41) will be
displayed.
zz
Press the <p> button several times until
simple information display is activated,
and then press the <q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose an image.
zz
Names will be displayed on detected
people.
• If you do not want names to display on images shot using Face ID, press the
<n> button, choose [Face ID Info] on the [1] tab, and then set [Name
Display] to [Off].
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images
you are looking for.
1 Display images in an index.
zz
Move the zoom lever toward <g> to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
zz
To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward <k>. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2 Choose an image.
zz
Turn the <7> dial to scroll through the
images.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose an image.
zz
An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
zz
Press the <m> button to view the
selected image in single-image display.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the <o><p>
buttons or turn the <7> dial rapidly), press the <n> button, and on the
[1] tab, set [Index Effect] to [Off].
108
Cover
Touch-Screen Operations
Still Images
zz
Pinch in to switch from single-image
display to index display.
zz
To view more thumbnails per screen,
pinch in again.
zz
Drag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
Movies
Filtering Display by [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ]
1 Choose [Image Search].
zz
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Image Search] on the [1] tab
(= 25).
zz
To view fewer thumbnails per screen,
spread your fingers apart.
zz
Touch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
2 Choose the first condition for
image display or navigation.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose a
display filter.
] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the <q><r> buttons or
turning the <7> dial. To perform an
action for all of these images together,
press the <m> button and go to step 4.
zz
When [
Still Images
Movies
Finding Images Matching Specified
Conditions
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering
image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect
(= 116) or delete (= 118) these images all at once.
3 Choose the second condition
and check the images found.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (= 121).
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose
Shot Date
Displays the images shot on a specific date.
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Still image/Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
[ ] mode (= 32).
Name
Displays images of a registered person (= 41).
another condition. Once you turn the
<7> dial, you can view the images
narrowed down by your conditions.
zz
To cancel this mode, press the <n>
button.
zz
To switch to filtered image display, press
the <m> button and go to step 4.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
109
Cover
4 View the filtered images.
Still Images
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to browse the images narrowed
down by your conditions.
zz
To exit filtered image display, press the
<o> button, and after [Image search
canceled] is displayed, press the <m>
button.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Filtering Display by [ ]
1 Choose [ ].
zz
Following steps 1 – 2 in “Filtering Display
by [ ], [
choose [
], [ ], or [ ]” (= 109),
] and press the <m> button.
2 Choose a person.
• When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons
to choose a person, and then press the
<m> button.
• To show or hide information, press the <p> button in step 4.
• Options for viewing the images found (in step 4) include “Navigating through
Images in an Index” (= 108), “Magnifying Images” (= 113), and “Viewing
Slideshows” (= 114). You can protect, erase, or print all images found or add
them to a photobook by choosing [Select All Images in Search] in “Protecting
Images” (= 116), “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (= 119), “Adding
Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 180), or “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(= 182).
• If you edit images and save them as new images (= 124 – 127), a message
is displayed, and the images that were found are no longer shown.
• [
• You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in steps 2 and 3.
• After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your conditions by
touching a condition again.
• You can also view images that include a specific person by touching the
person in step 2 and then touching the person again.
3 View the filtered images.
zz
Follow step 4 in “Filtering Display by [
[ ], [ ], or [
images.
]” (= 110) to view the
] is not available unless people are registered (= 41).
],
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
110
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Using the Control Ring to Jump
Use the control ring to find and jump between desired images quickly by
filtering image display according to your specified conditions.
Jump to Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (= 121).
Jump Shot Date
Jumps to the first image in each group of images that
were shot on the same date.
Jump 10 Images
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jump 100 Images
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
1 Choose a condition.
zz
Choose a condition (or jump method) in
single-image display by turning the <y>
ring and then pressing the <o><p>
buttons.
2 View images matching your
specified condition, or jump by
the specified amount.
zz
Turn the <y> ring to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specified number of images forward or
back.
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
zz
You can also jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of “Using the Control
Ring to Jump” (= 111) by dragging left
or right with two fingers.
Still Images
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Grouped images (either from continuous shooting (= 79) in [G], [M],
[B], or [D] mode (= 69, 94, or 95) or individual still images saved
as source data in [ ] mode (= 65)) are generally displayed together,
but they can also be viewed individually.
1 Choose a grouped image.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image labeled
], and then press the <m>
with [
button.
2 View images in the group
individually.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zz
Pressing the <q><r> buttons or turning
the <7> dial will display only images in
the group.
zz
Pressing the <o> button will display
[Display all images]. Press <m> to
cancel group playback.
111
• During group playback (step 2), you can browse through images quickly
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 108) and magnify them
“Magnifying Images” (= 113). By choosing [All Images in Group] for
“Protecting Images” (= 116), “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (= 119),
“Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 180), or “Adding Images to a
Photobook” (= 182), all images in the group can be manipulated at once.
• To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still images,
press the <n> button, choose [Group Images] on the [1] tab, and then
choose [Off] (= 25). However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during
individual playback.
• You can also view group images individually by touching [
in step 1.
] on the screen
Editing Face ID Information
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it or
erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Changing Names
1 Access the setting screen.
zz
Press the <n> button and choose
[Face ID Info] on the [1] tab (= 25).
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and
then press the <m> button.
2 Choose an image.
zz
Following the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID” (= 108),
choose an image and press the <m>
button.
zz
An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose
the name to change, and then press the
<m> button.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
112
3 Choose the editing option.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose [Overwrite],
and then press the <m> button.
4 Choose the name of the person
Image Viewing Options
Before Use
Still Images
Magnifying Images
1 Magnify an image.
to overwrite with.
zz
Moving the zoom lever toward <k> will
zz
Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
zz
To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward <g>. You can return to singleimage display by continuing to hold it.
Face Information” (= 45) to choose
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
• You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an image on the
] to display the orange frame, and then
screen in step 2, touching [
touching the face to overwrite its name.
• You can also choose editing options by touching them in step 3.
Erasing Names
Cover
2 Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
zz
To move the display position, press the
zz
Following step 3 in “Changing Names”,
choose [Erase] and press the <m>
button.
zz
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
• You can also erase names by touching [OK] after [Erase?] is displayed.
Approximate Position
of Displayed Area
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
zz
To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the <7> dial.
• You can return to single-image display from magnified display by pressing the
<n> button.
] is displayed by pressing the <m>
• You can check the focus when [
button to enlarge the AF frame position (Focus Check). Press the <m> button
repeatedly to enlarge any other AF frames displayed.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
113
Cover
Touch-Screen Operations
zz
Spread your fingers apart (pinch out) to
zoom in.
zz
You can magnify images up to about 10x
by repeating this action.
zz
To move the display position, drag across
the screen.
Still Images
Movies
Viewing Slideshows
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
1 Access the setting screen.
zz
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [1] tab
(= 25).
zz
Pinch in to zoom out.
zz
Touch [
] to restore single-image
display.
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Choose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (= 26).
3 Start automatic playback.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Start], and then
press the <m> button.
zz
The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
zz
Press the <n> button to stop the
slideshow.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• The camera’s power-saving functions (= 22) are deactivated
during slideshows.
114
Cover
• To pause or resume slideshows, press the <m> button.
• You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the <q><r>
buttons or turning the <7> dial. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the
<q><r> buttons down.
• You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.
Still Images
Auto Playback of Related Images
(Smart Shuffle)
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera
offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in
many kinds of scenes.
1 Choose Smart Shuffle.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose
[Smart Shuffle] on the [1] tab, and then
press the <m> button (= 25).
zz
Four candidate images are displayed.
2 Choose an image.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose the image you want to view next.
zz
Your chosen image is displayed in the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
zz
For full-screen display of the center
image, press the <m> button. To restore
the original display, press the <m>
button again.
zz
Press the <n> button to restore
single-image display.
• Only still images shot with this camera are played back using Smart
Shuffle.
• Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases:
-There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
-An unsupported image is currently displayed
-Images are shown in filtered display (= 109)
-During group playback (= 111)
• On the screen in step 2, touching an image above, below, or on either side will
show your chosen image in the center, surrounded by the next four candidate
images.
• For full-screen display of the center image in step 2, touch that image. To
restore the original display, touch the screen again.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
115
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Protecting Images
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera
(= 118).
Choosing a Selection Method
1 Access the setting screen.
zz
Press the <n> button and choose
[Protect] on the [1] tab (= 25).
2 Choose a selection method.
zz
Choose a menu item and an option as
desired (= 26).
zz
To return to the menu screen, press the
<n> button.
• Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format the
card (= 160, 161).
• Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure function. To
erase them this way, first cancel protection.
Choosing Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
zz
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (= 116), choose [Select] and
press the <m> button.
2 Choose an image.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.
zz
To cancel selection, press the <m>
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zz
Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3 Protect the image.
zz
Press the <n> button. A
confirmation message is displayed.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
• Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn
the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.
• You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in step 2, and you
].
can access the confirmation screen by touching [
• You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in step 3.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
116
Cover
Selecting a Range
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
1 Choose [Select Range].
zz
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (= 116), choose [Select
Range] and press the <m> button.
2 Choose a starting image.
zz
Press the <m> button.
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
zz
Images before the first image cannot be
selected as the last image.
4 Protect the images.
[Protect], and then press the <m>
button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
• You can also choose the first or last image by turning the <7> dial when the
top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
• You can also display the screen for choosing the first or last image by touching
an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3.
• You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen in step 4.
3 Choose an ending image.
zz
Press the <r> button to choose [Last
image], and then press the <m> button.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zz
Press the <p> button to choose
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
Before Use
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
117
Cover
Specifying All Images at Once
1 Choose [Select All Images].
zz
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (= 116), choose [Select All
Images] and press the <m> button.
2 Protect the images.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Protect], and then
press the <m> button.
Still Images
Movies
Erasing Images
Before Use
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (= 116) cannot be erased.
1 Choose an image to erase.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
2 Erase the image.
zz
Press the <a> button.
zz
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
• To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4 of
“Selecting a Range” or in step 2 of “Specifying All Images at Once”.
• You can also protect or unlock images by touching [Protect] or [Unlock] on the
screens described above.
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the <m>
button.
zz
The current image is now erased.
zz
To cancel erasure, press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the <m>
button.
• Pressing the <a> button while [ ] images are displayed will give you
], [Erase JPEG], or [Erase
+JPEG] for
the option of choosing [Erase
deletion.
• You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the screen in
step 2.
• Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (= 122).
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
118
Cover
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when erasing
images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images
(= 116) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1 Access the setting screen.
zz
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [1] tab (= 25).
2 Choose a selection method.
zz
Choose a menu item and an option as
desired (= 26).
zz
To return to the menu screen, press the
<n> button.
Choosing Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
zz
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (= 119), choose [Select] and
press the <m> button.
2 Choose an image.
zz
Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(= 116), [ ] is displayed.
zz
To cancel selection, press the <m>
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zz
Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3 Erase the image.
zz
Press the <n> button. A
confirmation message is displayed.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
119
Cover
Still Images
Selecting a Range
1 Choose [Select Range].
zz
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (= 119), choose [Select
Range] and press the <m> button.
2 Choose images.
zz
Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
Movies
Rotating Images
Before Use
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1 Choose [Rotate].
zz
Press the <n> button and choose
[Rotate] on the [1] tab (= 25).
(= 117) to specify images.
3 Erase the images.
zz
Press the <p> button to choose [Erase],
and then press the <m> button.
2 Rotate the image.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
zz
The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the <m> button.
Specifying All Images at Once
1 Choose [Select All Images].
zz
To return to the menu screen, press the
<n> button.
zz
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (= 119), choose [Select All
Images] and press the <m> button.
2 Erase the images.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
], [
], or [
] cannot
• Movies with an image quality of [
be rotated.
• Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off] (= 121).
• On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [
] to return to the menu screen.
[
] to rotate images or touch
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
120
Cover
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [1] tab, and then choose
[Off] (= 25).
Still Images
Movies
Tagging Images as Favorites
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to all
of those images.
• Viewing (= 104), Viewing Slideshows (= 114), Protecting Images
(= 116), Erasing Images (= 118), Adding Images to the Print List
(DPOF) (= 180), Adding Images to a Photobook (= 182)
1 Choose [Favorites].
zz
Press the <n> button and choose
• Images cannot be rotated (= 120) when you set [Auto Rotate] to
[Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in the
original orientation.
• In Smart Shuffle (= 115) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set to
[Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and rotated
images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.
[Favorites] on the [1] tab (= 25).
2 Choose an image.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.
zz
To untag the image, press the <m>
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zz
Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
121
Cover
3 Finish the setup process.
zz
Press the <n> button. A
confirmation message is displayed.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
• Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in
step 3.
• Favorite images will have a three-star rating (
) when transferred
to computers running Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista. (Does not
apply to movies or RAW images.)
• You can also select or clear current images by touching the screen in step 2.
• Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions (= 122).
Still Images
Movies
Convenient Control: Touch Actions
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to four
touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display.
Using a Function Assigned to [ ]
zz
Drag across the screen as shown.
zz
The function assigned to [ ] is now
activated.
zz
Similarly, you can also activate functions
assigned to [ ], [ ], and [ ] by
dragging across the screen.
zz
Customize functions assigned to Touch
Actions as desired.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
122
Cover
Changing Touch Actions Functions
Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging patterns
to them as desired.
1 Access the setting screen.
zz
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [1]
tab (= 25).
2 Assign a function to a dragging
pattern.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose a dragging pattern,
and then press the <q><r> buttons to
choose the function to assign.
Assignable Functions
Before Use
Favorites
Tag images as favorites, or untag the image.
Next Favorite
Switch to displaying the next image tagged as a favorite.
Common Camera
Operations
Previous Favorite
Switch to displaying the previous image tagged as a favorite.
Basic Guide
Next Date
Switch to displaying the first image with the next shooting
date.
Advanced Guide
Previous Date
Switch to displaying the first image with the previous shooting
date.
Smart Shuffle
Start Smart Shuffle playback.
To Camera
To Smartphone
To Computer
Access the Wi-Fi connection screen.
For Wi-Fi details, see “Wi-Fi Functions” (= 130).
To Printer
To Web Service
Slideshow
Start a slideshow.
Erase
Erase an image.
Protect
Protect an image or cancel protection.
Rotate
Rotate an image.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
123
Cover
Editing Still Images
3 Choose an image size.
• Image editing (= 124 – 127) is only available when the memory
card has sufficient free space.
• You can access editing screens for various functions by touching an image
after choosing the function in the menu.
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch [
] instead of
• When [
pressing the <n> button, if you prefer.
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch [
] instead of
• When [
pressing the <m> button, if you prefer.
Still Images
Resizing Images
Save a copy of images at a lower resolution.
1 Choose [Resize].
zz
Press the <n> button and choose
[Resize] on the [1] tab (= 25).
2 Choose an image.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
Before Use
<7> dial to choose the size, and then
press the <m> button.
zz
[Save new image?] is displayed.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
4 Save the new image.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
The image is now saved as a new file.
5 Review the new image.
zz
Press the <n> button. [Display new
image?] is displayed.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Yes], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
The saved image is now displayed.
• Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [
(= 47) or saved as [ ] in step 3.
• RAW images cannot be edited.
]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.
• You can also configure this setting by touching the size on the screen in step
3, touching it again, and then touching [OK].
• You can also view saved images by touching [Yes] on the screen in step 5.
124
Still Images
Cropping
review.
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.
1 Choose [Cropping].
zz
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Cropping] on the [1] tab
(= 25).
2 Choose an image.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
Cropping Area
Cover
4 Save as a new image and
3 Adjust the cropping area.
zz
A frame is displayed around the portion of
Before Use
zz
Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(= 124).
• Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [
(= 47) or resized to [ ] (= 124).
• RAW images cannot be edited.
Basic Guide
]
• Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping.
• Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped images.
• If you crop still images shot using Face ID (= 41), only the names of the
people left in the cropped image will remain.
• To move the frame, drag either image on the screen in step 3.
• You can also resize frames by pinching in or out (= 114) on the screen in
step 3.
the image to be cropped.
zz
The original image is shown in the upper
Preview of Image After
Cropping
Resolution After Cropping
left, and a preview of the image as
cropped is shown in the lower right.
zz
To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
zz
To move the frame, press the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
zz
To change the frame orientation, press
the <m> button.
zz
Faces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left
image. To crop the image based on this
frame, turn the <7> dial to switch to the
other frame.
zz
Press the <n> button.
Common Camera
Operations
Still Images
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate
file. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color Tones (My
Colors)” (= 78).
1 Choose [My Colors].
zz
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [1] tab
(= 25).
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
125
2 Choose an image.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
3 Choose an option.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
4 Save as a new image and
review.
zz
Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(= 124).
• Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little
lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired
color.
• Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.
• The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly from the color
of images shot using My Colors (= 78).
• You can also configure this setting by touching an option to select it on the
screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
Cover
Still Images
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
image as a separate file.
1 Choose [i-Contrast].
zz
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [i-Contrast] on the [1] tab
(= 25).
2 Choose an image.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
3 Choose an option.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
4 Save as a new image and
review.
zz
Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(= 124).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
• Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
• RAW images cannot be edited this way.
126
Cover
• If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting images using
[Low], [Medium], or [High].
• You can also configure this setting by touching [q][r] on the screen in step 3.
Still Images
Correcting Red-Eye
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate file.
1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
zz
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [1]
tab (= 25).
2 Choose an image.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
3 Correct the image.
zz
Press the <m> button.
zz
Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
zz
Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(= 113).
4 Save as a new image and
review.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose [New File],
and then press the <m> button.
zz
The image is now saved as a new file.
zz
Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images”
(= 124).
• Some images may not be corrected accurately.
• To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased.
• Protected images cannot be overwritten.
• RAW images cannot be edited this way.
• Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shot in [ ], but
the original image cannot be overwritten.
• You can save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite] on the screen in
step 4.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
127
Movies
Editing Movies
You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end.
1 Choose [*].
zz
Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(= 104), choose [*] and press the
<m> button.
zz
The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
3 Review the edited movie.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose
Before Use
[ ], and then press the <m> button.
The edited movie is now played.
zz
To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
zz
To cancel editing, press the <o><p>
buttons to choose [ ]. Press the <m>
button, choose [OK] (either press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial),
and then press the <m> button again.
Common Camera
Operations
4 Save the edited movie.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose
Movie Editing Panel
2 Specify portions to cut.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose
Movie Editing Bar
[ ] or [ ].
zz
To view the portions you can cut
(identified by [ ] on the screen), press
the <q><r> buttons or turn the <7>
dial to move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the
movie (from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and
cut the end of the movie by choosing
[ ].
zz
If you move [ ] to a position other than a
[ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest
[ ] mark on the right will be cut.
Cover
[
], and then press the <m> button.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose [New File],
and then press the <m> button.
zz
The movie is now saved as a new file.
zz
Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the <m> button.
• To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite]
in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased.
• If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
• Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
• When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack or
an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 168).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
128
Cover
Reducing File Sizes
Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
zz
On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],
and then press the <m> button.
zz
Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the <m> button.
• Compressed movies are saved in [
] format.
] movies cannot be compressed.
• [
• Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you choose
[Overwrite].
• However, you can compress and save edited movies as new files by choosing
[Compress & Sav.].
Movies
Editing Digest Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (= 32) recorded in [ ] mode can be erased, as
needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be recovered.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Select the clip to erase.
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Images (Digest Movies)” (= 107) to
play a movie created in [ ] mode, and
then press the <m> button to access the
movie control panel.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then
press the <m> button.
2 Choose [ ].
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3 Confirm erasure.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is connected to a
printer.
129
7
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Wi-Fi Functions
Basic Guide
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible devices, and use the camera
with Web services
What You Can Do with Wi-Fi.......................... 131
Preparing to Share Images via Wi-Fi............. 132
Uploading Images to Web Services..................... 132
Sending Images to a Smartphone........................ 132
Sending Images to Another Camera.................... 132
Sending Images to a Computer........................... 133
Printing Images Wirelessly................................... 133
Registering Web Services.............................. 133
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.............. 134
Registering Other Web Services.......................... 136
Installing CameraWindow on a
Smartphone.................................................... 136
Preparing to Register a Computer................. 137
Installing the Software.......................................... 137
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only).................................................... 139
Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu.............................. 139
Initial Connection via Wi-Fi................................... 139
After the Initial Wi-Fi Connection.......................... 140
Connecting via an Access Point.................... 140
Confirming Access Point Compatibility................. 140
Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points... 141
Connecting to Access Points in the List............... 144
Connecting without an Access Point............ 145
Previous Access Points........................................ 146
Connecting to Another Camera..................... 147
Sending Images............................................... 148
Sending Images Individually................................ 148
Sending Multiple Images...................................... 149
Adding Comments................................................ 149
Saving Images to a Computer........................ 150
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync).................................................. 151
Initial Preparations............................................... 151
Sending Images................................................... 152
Geotagging Images on the Camera............... 153
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.................. 153
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Editing Connection Information............................ 153
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default................ 155
Checking Your Computer Environment................ 137
130
What You Can Do with Wi-Fi
This camera is an approved Wi-Fi®* product. You can wirelessly connect to
and send images to the following devices and services.
Note that, in this chapter, wireless LAN functions other than Wi-Fi may be
referred to as Wi-Fi.
*Wi-Fi is a brand name that indicates interoperability certification of wireless
LAN devices.
Connecting to Web Services
Images can be sent to social network services and other Web
services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY*. Unsent images on
the camera can also be sent automatically to a computer or
Web service via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
*CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is an online photo service available to
those who have purchased this product.
Connecting to a Smartphone
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that
have Wi-Fi functions. You can also geotag your shots from a
connected smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and
other compatible devices are collectively referred to as
“smartphones”.
Connecting to Another Camera
Use the Wi-Fi function to send images between Canon-brand,
compact digital cameras.
Cover
Connecting to a Computer
Use the software to wirelessly send images from the camera to
a computer.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Connecting to a Printer
Basic Guide
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer
(supporting DPS over IP) to print them.
Advanced Guide
• Before using Wi-Fi, be sure to read “Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Precautions” (= 211) and “Security Precautions” (= 212).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
131
Preparing to Share Images via Wi-Fi
Cover
Sending Images to a Smartphone
Sending images via Wi-Fi requires some initial preparation on the camera
and target devices. Preparations and methods of sending images vary
depending on the destination.
Note that before using Wi-Fi (= 139), you will need to register a camera
nickname on the camera.
Internet
Uploading Images to Web Services
CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY
Camera
Access point
Smartphone
Tablet computer
Install CameraWindow on a smartphone (= 136)
Connect directly (= 145) or via an access point (= 140)
Send images (= 148)
Sending Images to Another Camera
Access point
Computer or smartphone
browsers
Camera
Register Web services (= 133)
Connect via an access point (= 140)
Send images (= 148)*
* You can send images to a computer or Web service (= 151).
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Camera
SNS, video-sharing
sites, e-mail
CameraWindow
Before Use
Connect to another camera (= 147)
Send images (= 148)
Camera
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
132
Sending Images to a Computer
Internet
CameraWindow
Access point
Camera
Computer
Check your computer environment (= 137)
Install CameraWindow on a computer (= 137)
Configure the computer for a Wi-Fi connection (Windows only, = 139)
Connect via an access point (= 140)
Save images to a computer (= 150)
Printing Images Wirelessly
Camera
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that you
want to use.
• A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and
other Web services.
• Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
• For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/
cig/).
• You must have an account with Web services other than CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check the
websites for each Web service you want to register.
• Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
Printer
Access point
Connect directly (= 145) or via an access point (= 140)
Print images (= 176)
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
133
Cover
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
4 Choose [
].
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose [
then press the <m> button.
], and
zz
From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ and visit the
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY site for your
region.
zz
Access the camera settings page.
zz
Once the login screen is displayed,
enter your user name and password
to log in. If you do not have a CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow
the instructions to complete member
registration (free of charge).
2 Choose your camera model.
zz
On this camera model, [
Advanced Guide
5 Establish a connection with the
access point.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Authenticate], and
then press the <m> button.
6 Choose an access point.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose a network (access
point), and then press the <m> button.
] is displayed
in the Wi-Fi menu.
zz
Once you choose the model, a page is
displayed for entering the authentication
code. On this page in step 9, you will
enter the authentication code displayed
on the camera after steps 3 – 8.
3 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zz
On the camera, access the Wi-Fi menu
(= 139).
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY and access the
camera settings page.
Before Use
7 Enter the access point
password.
zz
Press the <m> button to access the
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
keyboard, and then enter the password
(= 141).
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Next], and then
press the <m> button.
134
Cover
8 Choose [Auto] and establish the
connection.
zz
Complete the setup process on the
smartphone or computer.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
Common Camera
Operations
<7> dial to choose [Auto], and then
press the <m> button.
Basic Guide
zz
[ ] (= 151) and CANON iMAGE
zz
Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,
an authentication code is displayed.
9 Enter the authentication code.
zz
On the smartphone or computer, enter
the authentication code displayed on the
camera and go to the next step.
zz
A six-digit confirmation number is
displayed.
10 Check the confirmation
numbers and complete the
setup process.
zz
Make sure the confirmation number on
Before Use
GATEWAY are now added as
] icon changes
destinations, and the [
].
to [
zz
A message is displayed on the
smartphone or computer to indicate that
this process is finished. To add other
Web services, follow the procedure
in “Registering Other Web Services”
(= 136) from step 2.
• You can connect to WPS-compatible access points by choosing [WPS
Connection] in step 6. For details, see steps 6 – 8 in “Connecting to WPSCompatible Access Points” (= 142).
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
the camera matches the number on the
smartphone or computer.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
135
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the
camera first (= 134).
1 Access the Web service
settings screen.
zz
Follow step 1 in “Registering CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY” (= 134) to log in
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then
access the Web service settings screen.
2 Configure the Web service you
want to use.
zz
Follow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
3 Choose [
].
zz
Access the Wi-Fi menu (= 139), choose
] (either press the <o><p><q><r>
[
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button.
zz
The Web service settings are now
updated.
• If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to update the
camera settings.
Installing CameraWindow on a
Smartphone
Before connecting your camera to a smartphone, first install the free
dedicated application, CameraWindow, on your smartphone.
1 Connect the smartphone to a
network.
2 Install CameraWindow.
zz
For an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch,
download and install CameraWindow
from the App Store.
zz
For an Android device, download and
install CameraWindow from Google Play.
zz
After installation, use the camera
to establish a connection with the
smartphone (= 140, 145).
• For details on this application (supported smartphones and included functions),
refer to the Canon website.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
136
Preparing to Register a Computer
Prepare to register a computer. To save images to the computer wirelessly,
you must install CameraWindow.
Checking Your Computer Environment
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following
operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility
information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon
website.
Windows
Operating
System
Windows 8
Windows 7 SP1
Macintosh
Mac OS X 10.6.8
Mac OS X 10.7
Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later
• Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
• Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
Cover
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.
What you will need:
zz
Computer
zz
USB cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
*A USB cable is not included. Although you can install the software without using a
cable, some features will not be added.
1 Download the software.
zz
With a computer connected to the
Internet, access http://www.canon.com/
icpd/.
zz
Access the site for your country or region.
zz
Download the software.
2 Begin the installation.
zz
Click [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
137
Cover
3 When a message is displayed
prompting you to connect the
camera, choose whether to
connect or not.
When Connecting the Camera to
the Computer
zz
With the camera turned off, open the
cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal ( ).
zz
Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
zz
Turn the camera on, and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
Without Connecting the Camera
zz
Select [Install without connecting
the device] and follow the on-screen
instructions to complete the installation
process.
4 Install the files.
zz
Installation may take some time, depending
on computer performance and the Internet
connection.
zz
Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
zz
After installation when the camera is
connected to the computer, turn the
camera off before disconnecting the
cable.
• Using the software, you can update to the latest version, and download new
functions via the Internet (some software excluded).
• The first time you connect the camera to the computer, drivers will be installed,
so it may take a few minutes until camera images are accessible.
• Because the content and functions of software vary according to the camera
model, if you have several cameras, you must use each camera to update to
its latest version of the software.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
138
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi
Connection (Windows Only)
On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1 Confirm that the computer is
connected to the access point.
zz
For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2 Configure the setting.
zz
Click in the following order: [Start] menu
► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►
[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
zz
In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and configure the
setting.
• The following Windows settings are configured when you run the utility in
step 2.
-Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access via Wi-Fi.
-Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera.
-Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
-Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other automatically.
• Some security software may prevent you from completing the settings as
described here. Check the settings of your security software.
Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu
Initial Connection via Wi-Fi
To start with, register a camera nickname.
This nickname will be displayed on the screen of target devices when
connecting to other devices via Wi-Fi.
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zz
Press the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
zz
Press the <o> button.
2 Enter a nickname.
zz
Press the <m> button to access the
keyboard, and then enter a nickname
(= 27).
zz
Up to 16 characters can be used.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
The Wi-Fi menu is displayed.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
139
• When connecting wirelessly to any device other than a computer, a memory
card must be inserted in the camera. Additionally, the memory card must
contain images in order for you to access Web services or connect to a
smartphone or printer wirelessly.
• To change the camera’s nickname, choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab, and
then choose [Change Device Nickname].
• Nicknames beginning with a space cannot be entered in step 2. If you attempt
to do this and press the <n> button on the keyboard screen, a message
will be displayed. Press the <m> button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
After the Initial Wi-Fi Connection
• Once you have connected to devices via Wi-Fi, recent destinations will
be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the <o>
button. You can easily connect again by pressing the <o><p> buttons
to choose the device name and then pressing the <m> button.
• To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
<q><r> buttons, and then configure the setting.
• If you prefer not to display recent target devices, press the <n> button,
and on the [3] tab, choose [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
Connecting via an Access Point
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Confirming Access Point Compatibility
Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Specifications” (= 204).
If you are already using Wi-Fi, confirm the following items. For instructions
on checking network settings, refer to the access point user manual.
• If system administrator status is needed to adjust network settings,
contact the system administrator for details.
• These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
140
Cover
Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points
Check sheet
Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use.
Also called the “access point name” or “network name”.
○ None
○ WEP (open system
Network authentication / data encryption (encryption
authentication)
method / encryption mode)
○ WPA-PSK (TKIP)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. ○ WPA-PSK (AES)
○ WPA2-PSK (TKIP)
○ WPA2-PSK (AES)
Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless
transmission. Also called the “encryption key” or “network
key”.
Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication /
data encryption.
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi‑Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN Method
for settings on a WPS supported device.
1 Confirm that the target device is
connected to the access point.
zz
This step is not required when connecting
to Web services.
zz
For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2 Access the Wi-Fi menu
○1
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point supports
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) or not. Refer to the user manual provided with
your access point to check if it supports WPS.
• A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for connecting
multiple computers. A router that contains an internal Wi-Fi function is called a
“Wi-Fi router”.
• This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access points”.
• If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure to add the
camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can check your camera’s
MAC address by choosing the [3] tab, [Wi-Fi Settings], and then [Check MAC
Address].
(= 139).
3 Choose the target device.
zz
Choose the target device (either press
the <o><p><q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
zz
To connect to a smartphone, choose [ ].
zz
To connect to a computer, choose [ ].
zz
To connect to a printer, choose [2].
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
141
Cover
zz
To connect to a Web service, choose
the service icon. If multiple recipients
or sharing options are used with a Web
service, choose the desired item on the
[Select Recipient] screen (either press
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <7>
dial), and then press the <m> button.
4 Choose [Add a Device].
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
6 Choose [WPS Connection].
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [WPS Connection],
and then press the <m> button.
zz
When the [Waiting to connect] screen
is displayed (= 145), choose [Switch
Network] (either press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
7 Choose [PBC Method].
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [PBC Method], and
then press the <m> button.
5 To connect to a smartphone or
printer:
Choose [Switch Network].
Before Use
8 Establish the connection.
zz
On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
zz
On the camera, press the <m> button.
zz
The camera will connect to the access
point.
zz
If you have selected [ ], [2], or [
] in
step 3, devices connected to the access
point are listed on the [Select a Device]
screen displayed next.
zz
If you have selected a Web service in
step 3, go to step 11.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
142
9 To connect to a smartphone,
printer, or computer:
Choose the target device.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose the computer name,
and then press the <m> button.
zz
If you have selected a smartphone,
printer, or Macintosh computer, go to
step 11.
10 If you have selected a computer
running Windows in step 9 for
the first time:
Install a driver.
zz
When the screen at left is displayed on
the camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
zz
Double-click the connected camera icon.
zz
Driver installation will begin.
zz
After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
11 Send or print the images.
zz
The screen displayed when the devices
are connected varies depending on the
target device.
zz
When the camera is connected to a
smartphone or Web service, an image
transfer screen is displayed. For
instructions on sending images, see
“Sending Images” (= 148).
zz
When the camera is connected to a
computer, the camera screen is blank.
Follow the steps in “Saving Images to a
Computer” (= 150) to save images to
the computer.
zz
When the camera is connected to a
printer, you can print by following the
same steps as for printing via USB. For
details, see “Printing Images” (= 176).
• If you chose [PIN Method] in step 7, a PIN code will be displayed on the
screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point. Choose a device in the
[Select a Device] screen. For further details, refer to the user manual included
with your access point.
• To add multiple destinations, repeat this procedure from the first step.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
143
Cover
3 Enter the access point
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following
step 4 in “Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 142).
• To reconnect to the access point, confirm that the target device is already
connected to it, and then follow the procedure from step 9. Note that this
step is not required when connecting to Web services.
• To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure from step 6.
Connecting to Access Points in the List
1 View the listed access points.
zz
View the listed networks (access
points) as described in steps 1 – 5 of
“Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access
Points” (= 141 – 142).
2 Choose an access point.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose a network (access
point), and then press the <m> button.
password.
zz
Press the <m> button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(= 141).
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Next], and then
press the <m> button.
4 Choose [Auto].
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Auto], and then
press the <m> button.
zz
If you selected [ ], [2], or [ ] as the
target device, see “Connecting to WPSCompatible Access Points”, starting with
step 9 (= 143).
zz
If you selected a Web service as the
destination, see “Connecting to WPSCompatible Access Points”, starting with
step 11 (= 143).
• To determine the access point password, check on the access point itself or
refer to the user manual.
• Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are detected,
choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to manually set an access point. Follow onscreen instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.
• When you use an access point that you have already connected to for
connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the password in step 3. To
use the same password, choose [Next] (either press the <o><p> buttons or
turn the <7> dial) and press the <m> button.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
144
Connecting without an Access Point
When connecting to a smartphone or printer via Wi-Fi, you can use the
camera as an access point (Camera Access Point mode) instead of using
another access point.
Similarly, no access point is used in camera-to-camera connections
(= 147).
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu
(= 139).
2 Choose the target device.
zz
Choose the target device (either press
the <o><p><q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
zz
To connect to a smartphone, choose [ ].
zz
To connect to a printer, choose [2].
3 Choose [Add a Device].
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
Cover
4 On the target device, connect
to the network identified on the
camera.
zz
In the smartphone or printer’s Wi-Fi
setting menu, choose the SSID (network
name) displayed on the camera.
5 For a smartphone connection:
Start CameraWindow on the
smartphone.
zz
The first time CameraWindow starts
up, register a smartphone nickname for
display on the camera.
zz
Once the smartphone is recognized on
the camera, the device connection screen
will be displayed on the camera.
6 Choose the target device.
zz
Choose the target device name (either
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
7 For a smartphone connection:
zz
The camera’s SSID is displayed.
Adjust the privacy setting.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
<7> dial to choose [Yes], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
You can now use the smartphone to
receive images sent from the camera, or to
geotag images on the camera (= 153).
145
Cover
8 Send or print the images.
zz
The screen displayed when the devices
are connected varies depending on the
target device.
zz
When the camera is connected to a
smartphone, an image transfer screen
is displayed. For instructions on sending
images, see “Sending Images” (= 148).
zz
When the camera is connected to a
printer, you can print by following the
same steps as for printing via USB. For
details, see “Printing Images” (= 176).
• All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 7. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone,
choose [No] in step 7.
• To change privacy settings for smartphones added to the list,
choose the smartphone whose settings you want to change from
[Edit a Device] in step 3, and then choose [View Settings].
• To add multiple devices, repeat this procedure from the first step.
• For better security, you can require password input on the screen in step 3
by accessing MENU and choosing [3] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password]
► [On]. In this case, in the password field on the device in step 4, enter the
password displayed on the camera.
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following
step 3 in “Connecting without an Access Point” (= 145).
• To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose [Set
Camera As Access Point].
• When reconnecting via a previous access point, connect the target
device to the access point in step 4.
• To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points” from step 6
(= 142).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
146
Connecting to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as follows.
• Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be connected
to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-Fi cards cannot
be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function. You cannot connect to
PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS
cameras with this camera.
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu
(= 139).
2 Choose camera.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose [4], and
then press the <m> button.
3 Choose [Add a Device].
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
zz
Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
zz
Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
Cover
zz
When the target camera has been added
successfully, the image transfer screen
will be displayed. Proceed to “Sending
Images” (= 148).
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• To add multiple cameras, repeat the above procedures starting from step 1.
• Once a camera is added, the camera name will be displayed on the screen in
step 3. To connect to a camera again, simply choose the camera name from
the list.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
147
Cover
Sending Images
Send images wirelessly to destinations registered on the camera as follows.
Note that when images are sent to a computer, the computer is used
instead of the camera (= 150).
Sending Images Individually
1 Choose an image.
zz
Turn the <7> dial to choose an image
to send.
2 Send the image.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the
<m> button.
zz
When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the <m> button.
zz
Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
zz
After images are uploaded to a Web
service, [OK] is displayed. Press the
<m> button to return to the playback
screen.
zz
After sending images to a camera or
smartphone, [Transfer completed] will be
displayed, and the display will return to
the image transfer screen.
• For movies that you do not compress (= 128), a separate,
compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this
may delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is
enough space for it on the memory card.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
• Keep your fingers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area (= 3).
Covering this may decrease the speed of your image transfers.
• Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take a long
time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera battery level.
• When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image quality
varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the smartphone user
manual.
• To disconnect from the camera, press the <n> button, choose [OK] on
the confirmation screen (either press the <q><r> buttons or turn the <7>
dial), and then press the <m> button. You can also use the smartphone to
end the connection.
• On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following icons.
[ ] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
• Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending images
you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Choosing the Image Resolution (Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the <o><p>
buttons, and then press the <m> button. On the next screen, choose the
resolution by pressing the <o><p> buttons, and then press the <m>
button.
• To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
• Choosing [ ] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected
size before sending.
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• Movies cannot be resized.
148
Cover
Sending Multiple Images
1 Choose [Select and send].
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the
<m> button.
2 Choose images.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose an image to send, and then press
the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.
zz
To cancel selection, press the <m>
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zz
Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
zz
After you finish choosing images, press
the <n> button.
3 Send the images.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Send], and then
press the <m> button.
• Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. Only one movie can be sent.
• Movies up to five minutes (or digest movies up to 13 minutes) can be sent.
• Web services may limit the number of images you can send. For details, refer
to the Web service you are using.
• You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom lever twice toward
<k> to access single-image display and then pressing the <q><r> buttons or
turning the <7> dial.
• In step 3, you can choose the desired resolution (size) of your images before
sending (= 47).
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to
e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of characters
and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web service.
1 Access the screen for adding
comments.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose [ ], and then press the <m>
button.
2 Add a comment (= 27).
3 Send the image.
zz
Follow the steps in “Sending Images
Individually” (= 148) to send the image.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is automatically sent.
149
Saving Images to a Computer
When sending images to a computer, use the computer instead of the
camera.
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some
software excluded).
1 Display CameraWindow.
zz
In Windows, access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
zz
On a Macintosh computer,
CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
2 Import images.
zz
Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
zz
Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
zz
Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete. For
instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to “Software Instruction
Manual” (= 173).
Cover
• Movies will take longer to import since the file size is larger than still images.
• To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
• You can also specify to save all images or only selected images to the
computer, and you can change the destination folder. Refer to “Software
Instruction Manual” (= 173) for details.
• In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the
taskbar.
• If CameraWindow is not displayed when using a Macintosh computer, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
• Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your
camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations
apply.
-It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until
camera images are accessible.
-Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.
-RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be
saved.
-Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer.
-Some problems may occur when saving images or image information,
depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image
file sizes.
-Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as
movie editing.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
150
3 Choose the type of images
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
to send (only when sending
movies with images).
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can be
sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Install and configure the software on the destination computer.
1 Install the software.
choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab
(= 25).
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the
<q><r> buttons to choose [Stills/
Movies].
• To choose a Web service as the destination, follow the steps in “Registering
Other Web Services” (= 136) to update the camera settings.
zz
Install the software on a computer
connected to the Internet (= 137).
2 Register the camera.
zz
Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [
],
and then click [Add new camera].
zz
Macintosh: In the menu bar, click [
zz
Press the <n> button, and then
],
and then click [Register Camera].
zz
Choose a source camera from one of
the cameras listed, which are linked to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (= 134).
zz
Once the camera is registered and ready
to receive images, the icon changes to
[ ].
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
151
Cover
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. Stored
images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer and
save the images.
zz
Follow the steps in “Connecting to WPSCompatible Access Points” (= 141) to
choose [ ].
zz
Once the connection is established, the
images are sent.
zz
When the images have been sent
successfully to the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, [ ] is displayed on
the screen.
zz
Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
zz
Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
• When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery pack
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 168).
• Even if images were imported to the computer through a different method, any
images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY will be sent to
the computer.
• Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same network
as the camera, because images are sent via the access point instead of
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images stored on the computer are
sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so the computer must be connected to the
Internet.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
152
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow
application (= 136) can be added to images on the camera. Images are
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
• Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home time
zone are set correctly. (See “Setting the Date and Time” (= 15).)
Additionally, in [Time Zone] (= 158), specify any shooting
destinations that are in other time zones.
• The smartphone you will use for geotagging must be authorized to
view the images on the camera (= 145).
• Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu
(= 139).
2 Choose a device to edit.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons
or turn the <7> dial to choose the icon
of the device to edit, and then press the
<m> button.
3 Choose [Edit a Device].
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Edit a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
4 Choose a device to edit.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose the device to edit,
and then press the <m> button.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
153
Cover
5 Choose an item to edit.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an item to edit, and
then press the <m> button.
zz
The items you can change depend on
what device or service the camera will
access.
Connection
Configurable Items
4
c
O
O
[View Settings] (= 145)
–
O
[Erase Connection Info] (= 154)
O
O
[Change Device Nickname] (= 154)
Web
Services
O
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
O : Configurable – : Not configurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
zz
Following step 5 in “Editing Connection
Information” (= 154), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the <m>
button.
zz
Select the input field and press the <m>
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (= 27).
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
zz
Following step 5 in “Editing Connection
Information” (= 154), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the <m>
button.
zz
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
zz
The connection information will be
erased.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
154
Cover
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the camera
to another person, or dispose of it.
1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
zz
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab
(= 25).
2 Choose [Reset Settings].
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Reset Settings], and
then press the <m> button.
3 Restore the default settings.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be sure
that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
• To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose [Reset All] in the
[3] tab (= 165).
155
8
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Setting Menu
Basic Guide
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions............... 157
Silencing Camera Operations.............................. 157
Adjusting the Volume........................................... 157
Customizing Sounds............................................ 157
Hiding Hints and Tips........................................... 158
Date and Time...................................................... 158
World Clock.......................................................... 158
Lens Retraction Timing........................................ 159
Using Eco Mode................................................... 159
Power-Saving Adjustment.................................... 159
Screen Brightness................................................ 160
Start-up Screen.................................................... 160
Formatting Memory Cards................................... 160
File Numbering..................................................... 161
Date-Based Image Storage.................................. 162
Metric / Non-Metric Display.................................. 162
Electronic Level Calibration.................................. 162
Deactivating Touch-Screen Operations................ 163
Advanced Guide
Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity.......... 163
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images................................................................. 163
Checking Certification Logos............................... 164
Display Language................................................ 164
Adjusting Other Settings...................................... 164
Restoring Defaults................................................ 165
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
156
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Functions can be configured on the [3] tab. Customize commonly used
functions as desired, for greater convenience (= 25).
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
Cover
Adjusting the Volume
Before Use
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
zz
Choose [Volume], and then press the
<m> button.
zz
Choose an item, and then press the
<q><r> buttons to adjust the volume.
zz
Choose [Mute], and then choose [On].
Customizing Sounds
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.
• Operation can also be silenced by holding down the <p> button as you turn
the camera on.
• Sound is not played during movies (= 104) if you mute camera sounds. To
restore sound during movies, press the <o> button or drag up across the
screen. Adjust volume as needed by pressing the <o><p> buttons or by
dragging up or down.
zz
Choose [Sound Options], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
Choose an item, and then press the
<q><r> buttons to choose an option.
• The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [
be changed.
] mode (= 32) cannot
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
157
Cover
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (= 24) or
MENU (= 25) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
zz
Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
[Off].
World Clock
Before Use
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you
travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to that
time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date/
Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 15).
1 Specify your destination.
zz
Choose [Time Zone], and then press the
<m> button.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
zz
Choose [Date/Time], and then press the
<m> button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose an
option, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the <o><p> buttons or
turning the <7> dial.
<7> dial to choose [ World], and then
press the <m> button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose the destination.
zz
To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), press the <o><p> buttons to
choose [ ].
zz
Press the <m> button.
2 Switch to the destination time
zone.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ World], and then
press the <n> button.
zz
[ ] is now shown on the shooting screen
(= 191).
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (= 16) will automatically
Home] time and date.
update your [
158
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the <1> button in Shooting mode (= 22). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the <1> button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
zz
Choose [Lens Retract], and then choose
[0 sec.].
2Shoot.
zz
To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto Power
Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (= 22).
zz
Choose [Power Saving], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
After choosing an item, press the
<q><r> buttons to adjust it as needed.
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode. When
the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery
consumption.
1 Configure the setting.
zz
Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose
[On].
zz
[
] is now shown on the shooting
screen (= 191).
zz
The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
• To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
• The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power Down] to [Off].
• These power-saving functions are not available when you have set Eco mode
(= 159) to [On].
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
159
Cover
Screen Brightness
Formatting Memory Cards
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
zz
Choose [LCD Brightness], and then
press the <q><r> buttons to adjust the
brightness.
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you
should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images
on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.
1 Access the [Format] screen.
zz
Choose [Format], and then press the
<m> button.
2 Choose [OK].
• For maximum brightness, press and hold the <p> button for at least one
second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-image display.
(This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting on the [3] tab.) To restore
the original brightness, press and hold the <p> button again for at least one
second or restart the camera.
Start-up Screen
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose
[Cancel], choose [OK] (either press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial),
and then press the <m> button.
3 Format the memory card.
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as
follows.
zz
Choose [Start-up Image], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option.
zz
To begin the formatting process, press
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <7>
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
<m> button.
zz
When formatting is finished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the <m> button.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards, take
steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically
destroying cards.
160
Cover
• The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than
the advertised capacity.
Low-Level Formatting
File Numbering
Before Use
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns file numbers.
Perform low-level formatting in these cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing is
slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly stops.
Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-level
formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other
steps to back them up.
zz
Choose [File Numbering], and then
choose an option.
zz
On the screen in step 1 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (= 160), press the
<o><p> buttons or turn the <7> dial
to choose [Low Level Format], and then
press the <q><r> buttons to select this
option. A [ ] icon is displayed.
zz
Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (= 160) to continue with the
formatting process.
• Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 160),
because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card.
• You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing [Stop]. In this
case, all data will be erased, but the memory card can be used normally.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th shot is taken/
saved) even if you switch memory cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory cards, or
when a new folder is created.
• Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be numbered
consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly inserted
memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001, use an empty (or formatted
(= 160)) memory card.
• Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (= 173) for information on the card
folder structure and image formats.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
161
Cover
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
zz
Choose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily].
zz
Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (= 98) to help you
level the camera in advance.
1 Make sure the camera is level.
zz
Place the camera on a flat surface, such
as a table.
2 Calibrate the electronic level.
zz
Choose [Electronic Level], and then press
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (= 30), the MF
indicator (= 80), GPS information for elevation (= 153), and elsewhere
from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
the <m> button.
zz
Choose [Calibrate] and press the <m>
button. A confirmation message is
displayed.
zz
Choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
zz
Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
zz
Choose [Electronic Level], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
Choose [Reset], and then press the
<m> button.
zz
Once the electronic level has been reset,
the menu screen is displayed again.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
162
Cover
Deactivating Touch-Screen Operations
The touch-screen can be disabled to prevent unintended touch operations.
zz
Choose [Touch Operation], and then
choose [Off].
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
zz
Choose [Copyright Info], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn
Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity
Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased, so that the camera
responds to a lighter touch.
zz
Choose [Touch Response], and then
choose [High].
the <7> dial to choose [Enter Author’s
Name] or [Enter Copyright Details]. Press
the <m> button to access the keyboard,
and enter the name (= 27).
zz
Press the <n> button. When [Accept
changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes]
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
zz
The information set here will now be
recorded in images.
• To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info] on the
screen above, and then press the <m> button.
• You can also use the software (= 173) to enter, change, and delete copyright
information. Some characters entered with the software may not display on the
camera, but will be correctly recorded in images.
• You can check copyright information recorded in images by using the software,
once you save the images to a computer.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
163
Cover
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
Display Language
Before Use
Change the display language as needed.
zz
Choose [Language
], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose a language,
and then press the <m> button.
zz
Follow the steps in “Setting Copyright
Information to Record in Images”
(= 163) and choose [Delete Copyright
Info].
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
• The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
• You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by pressing and
holding the <m> button and immediately pressing the <n> button.
Adjusting Other Settings
Checking Certification Logos
Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be viewed
on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on the
camera packaging, or on the camera body.
zz
Choose [Certification Logo Display], and
then press the <m> button.
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [3] tab.
• [Video System] (= 172)
• [Ctrl via HDMI] (= 170)
• [Wi-Fi Settings] (= 130)
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
164
Cover
Restoring Defaults
Before Use
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Access the [Reset All] screen.
zz
Choose [Reset All], and then press the
Advanced Guide
<m> button.
2 Restore default settings.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
Default settings are now restored.
• The following functions are not restored to default settings.
-Information registered using Face ID (= 41)
-[3] tab settings [Date/Time] (= 158), [Time Zone] (= 158) [Language
(= 164), and [Video System] (= 171)
-Custom white balance data you have recorded (= 76)
-Shooting mode chosen in [K] (= 54) or [ ] (= 56) mode
-Movie mode (= 67)
-Wi-Fi settings (= 130)
-Calibrated value for the electronic level (= 162)
-Copyright information (= 163)
]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
165
9
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Accessories
Basic Guide
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and other compatible
accessories sold separately
System Map..................................................... 167
Optional Accessories..................................... 168
Power Supplies.................................................... 168
Flash Unit............................................................. 168
Other Accessories................................................ 168
Printers................................................................. 169
Using Optional Accessories.......................... 169
Printing Images............................................... 176
Playback on a TV................................................. 169
Powering the Camera with Household Power...... 172
Easy Print............................................................. 176
Configuring Print Settings.................................... 177
Printing Movie Scenes......................................... 179
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)............... 180
Adding Images to a Photobook............................ 182
Using the Software.......................................... 173
Software............................................................... 173
Computer Connections via a Cable..................... 173
Saving Images to a Computer.............................. 174
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
166
Cover
System Map
Before Use
Flash Unit
Included Accessories
Battery Pack
NB‑6LH*1
Basic Guide
Battery Charger
CB‑2LY/CB‑2LYE*1
High-Power Flash
HF-DC2
Wrist Strap
Case
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*2
Waterproof Case
WP-DC51
Power
Memory Card
Card Reader
Cables
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC40
Windows/
Macintosh
Computer
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible Printers
HDMI Cable HTC-100
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
Common Camera
Operations
TV/Video
System
*1Also available for purchase separately.
*2A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine
Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire,
etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage
and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to
repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you
may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.
Note that availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
167
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability
varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available.
Power Supplies
Cover
Flash Unit
Before Use
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
zz
External flash for illuminating subjects
that are out of range of the built-in flash.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Battery Pack NB-6LH
zz
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger
CB-2LY/CB-2LYE
zz
Charger for Battery Pack NB-6LH
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40
zz
For powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack in the camera.
• The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can attach to know
the charging status at a glance. Attach the cover so that  is visible on a
charged battery pack, and attach it so that  is not visible on an uncharged
battery pack.
• Battery Pack NB-6L is also supported.
Other Accessories
Waterproof Case WP-DC51
zz
For underwater photography at depths of
up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for
shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on
ski slopes.
Interface Cable IFC‑400PCU
zz
For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
zz
Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy
playback on the larger TV screen.
HDMI Cable HTC-100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zz
For connecting the camera to an HDMI
input of a high-definition TV.
168
Cover
Printers
Still Images
Movies
Using Optional Accessories
Canon-Brand PictBridgeCompatible Printers
zz
Printing images without a computer is
possible by connecting the camera to
a Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible
printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
Playback on a TV
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger
screen of the TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
• Some information may not be displayed on the TV (= 192).
Still Images
Movies
Playback on a High-Definition TV
Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV.
Movies shot at a resolution of [
], [
], or [
] can be viewed in
high definition.
1 Make sure the camera and TV
are off.
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
zz
On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
169
Cover
Still Images
zz
On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Movies
Before Use
Controlling the Camera with a TV Remote
Connecting the camera to an HDMI CEC-compatible TV enables playback
(including slideshow playback) using the TV remote control.
Depending on the TV, you may need to adjust some TV settings. For
details, refer to the TV manual.
1 Configure the setting.
3 Turn the TV on and switch to
video input.
zz
Switch the TV input to the video input you
connected the cable to in step 2.
4 Turn the camera on.
zz
Press the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
zz
Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
zz
When finished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
• Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
• Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is connected to an
HDTV.
zz
Press the <n> button, choose
[Ctrl via HDMI] on the [3] tab, and then
choose [Enable] (= 25).
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
zz
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Playback on a
High-Definition TV” (= 169) to connect
the camera to the TV.
3 Display images.
zz
Turn on the TV. On the camera, press the
<1> button.
zz
Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
4 Control the camera with the TV
remote.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons on the remote
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
to browse images.
zz
To display the camera control panel,
press the OK/Select button. Select control
panel options by pressing the <q><r>
buttons to choose an option, and then
pressing the OK/Select button again.
170
Cover
Still Images
Camera Control Panel Options Shown on the TV
Return
Group Playback
.
Closes the menu.
Displays sets of images, either from continuous
shooting (= 79) in [G], [M], [B], or [D] mode
(= 69, 94, or 95) or individual still images
saved as source data in [ ] mode (= 65). (Only
displayed when a grouped image is selected.)
Play Movie
Starts movie playback. (Only displayed when a movie
is selected.)
Slideshow
Starts slideshow playback. To switch images during
playback, press the <q><r> buttons on the remote
control.
Index Playback
l Change Display
Displays multiple images in an index.
Switches display modes (= 106).
• Pressing buttons, such as the <n> button, on the camera will switch
control to the camera itself, which will prevent remote control until you return to
single-image display.
• Moving the zoom lever on the camera will switch control to the camera itself,
which will prevent remote control until you return to single-image display.
• The camera may not always respond correctly even if the remote is for an
HDMI CEC-compatible TV.
Movies
Playback on a Standard-Definition TV
Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the
TV as you control the camera.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Make sure the camera and TV
are off.
Yellow
Yellow
White Red
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
zz
On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into
the video inputs as shown.
Red
White
zz
On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3 Display images.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zz
Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a
High-Definition TV” (= 170) to display
images.
171
Cover
• Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output
format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the
video output format, press the <n> button and choose [Video
System] on the [3] tab.
• Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
• When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while previewing
shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow the same steps as when
using the camera screen. However, AF-Point Zoom (= 49), MF-Point
Zoom (= 81), MF Peaking (= 81) and Night Display (= 92) are not
available.
Still Images
Movies
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
1 Make sure the camera is off.
2 Insert the coupler.
zz
Follow step 2 in “Inserting the Battery
Terminals
Pack and Memory Card” (= 13) to
open the cover.
zz
Insert the coupler facing the direction
shown, just as you would a battery pack
(following step 3 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory Card” (= 13)).
zz
Follow step 5 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory Card” (= 14) to
close the cover.
3 Connect the adapter to the
coupler.
zz
Open the cover and insert the adapter
plug fully into the coupler.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
4 Connect the power cord.
zz
Insert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
zz
Turn the camera on and use it as desired.
zz
When finished, turn the camera off and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
• Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the
camera.
• Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing so
could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
172
Using the Software
The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced
below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer.
Software
After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it, you
can do the following things on your computer.
CameraWindow
zz
Import images and change camera settings
ImageBrowser EX
zz
Manage images: view, search, and organize
zz
Print and edit images
Digital Photo Professional
zz
Browse, process and edit RAW images
• Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
Software Instruction Manual
Refer to the instruction manual when using the software. The manual can
be accessed from the help system of software (some software excluded).
Cover
Computer Connections via a Cable
Common Camera
Operations
Checking Your Computer Environment
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed system
requirements and compatibility information, including support in new
operating systems, visit the Canon website.
Windows
Operating
System*
Windows 8
Windows 7 SP1
Windows Vista SP2
Windows XP SP3
Before Use
Macintosh
Mac OS X 10.6
Mac OS X 10.7
Mac OS X 10.8
*When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system requirements in
“Checking Your Computer Environment” (= 137).
• Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements, including
supported OS versions.
Installing the Software
For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software” (= 137).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
173
Cover
Saving Images to a Computer
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some
software excluded).
1 Connect the camera to the
computer.
zz
With the camera turned off, open the
cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal ( ).
2 Turn the camera on to access
Before Use
CameraWindow.
zz
Press the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
zz
On a Macintosh computer,
CameraWindow is displayed when a
connection is established between the
camera and computer.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zz
For Windows, follow the steps introduced
below.
zz
In the screen that displays, click the [
link to modify the program.
]
zz
Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
zz
Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
Camera] and then click [OK].
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
zz
Double-click [
].
Common Camera
Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
174
Cover
CameraWindow
3 Save the images to the
computer.
zz
Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
zz
Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
zz
After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the <1> button
to turn the camera off, and unplug the
cable.
zz
For instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to “Software Instruction
Manual” (= 173).
• In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the
taskbar.
• To start CameraWindow in Windows Vista or XP, click [Downloads Images
From Canon Camera] on the screen displayed when you turn the camera on
in step 2. If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the [Start] menu and choose
[All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ► [CameraWindow] ► [CameraWindow].
• On a Macintosh computer, if CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click
the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of the desktop).
• Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your
camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations
apply.
-It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until
camera images are accessible.
-Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.
-RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be
saved.
-Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer.
-Some problems may occur when saving images or image information,
depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image
file sizes.
-Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as
movie editing.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
175
Still Images
Movies
Printing Images
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer. On
the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare orders
for photo development services, and prepare orders or print images for
photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Still Images
Easy Print
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (sold separately) with the USB cable.
1 Make sure the camera and
printer are off.
2 Connect the camera to the
printer.
zz
Open the cover. Holding the smaller
cable plug in the orientation shown, insert
the plug fully into the camera terminal.
zz
Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
3 Turn the printer on.
4 Turn the camera on.
zz
Press the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
5 Choose an image.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
6 Access the printing screen.
zz
Press the <m> button.
7 Print the image.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Print], and then
press the <m> button.
zz
Printing now begins.
zz
To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is finished.
zz
When you are finished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
• For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately), see
“Printers” (= 169).
• RAW images cannot be printed.
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
176
Cover
Still Images
Configuring Print Settings
1 Access the printing screen.
zz
Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(= 176) to access the screen at left.
2 Configure the settings.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <7> dial to choose an item, and
then choose an option by pressing the
<q><r> buttons.
Default
Date
File No.
Both
Off
Default
Matches current printer settings.
Prints images with the date added.
Prints images with the file number added.
Cropping Images before Printing
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1 Choose [Cropping].
zz
After following step 1 in “Configuring Print
Settings” (= 177) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
<m> button.
zz
A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2 Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
Prints images with both the date and file number added.
zz
To resize the frame, move the zoom
–
lever.
zz
To move the frame, press the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
zz
To rotate the frame, turn the <7> dial.
zz
When finished, press the <m> button.
Matches current printer settings.
Off
–
On
Uses information from the time of shooting to print under
optimal settings.
Red-Eye 1
Still Images
Corrects red-eye.
No. of Copies Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print (= 177).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details
(= 178).
3 Print the image.
zz
Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (= 176)
to print.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
• Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with
] selected.
[Date Stamp
177
Cover
4 Choose a layout.
Still Images
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
<7> dial to choose an option.
1 Choose [Paper Settings].
zz
When choosing [N-up], press the
zz
After following step 1 in “Configuring Print
<q><r> buttons to specify the number of
images per sheet.
zz
Press the <m> button.
Settings” (= 177) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the <m> button.
2 Choose a paper size.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
3 Choose a type of paper.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
5 Print the image.
Available Layout Options
Default
Matches current printer settings.
Bordered
Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless
Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up
Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identification purposes.
Only available for images with a resolution of L and an aspect ratio of
4:3.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
178
Cover
Movies
Still Images
Printing ID Photos
Printing Movie Scenes
1 Access the printing screen.
1 Choose [ID Photo].
zz
Follow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
zz
Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
(= 176) to choose a movie, and then
press the <m> button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [c], and then press
the <m> button. The screen at left is
displayed.
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(= 178), choose [ID Photo] and press
the <m> button.
2 Choose the long and short side
length.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
2 Choose a printing method.
<7> dial to choose an item. Choose the
length by pressing the <q><r> buttons,
and then press the <m> button.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <7> dial to choose [ ], and then
press the <q><r> buttons to choose the
printing method.
3 Choose the printing area.
3 Print the image.
zz
Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (= 177) to choose the printing
area.
4 Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
Single
Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single sheet of
paper. You can also print the folder number, file number, and elapsed
time for the frame by setting [Caption] to [On].
• To cancel printing in progress, press the <m> button.
• [ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand PictBridgecompatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier models.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
179
Cover
Still Images
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Batch printing (= 182) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of copies,
as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform to
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
• RAW images cannot be included in print list.
Still Images
Configuring Print Settings
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.
• Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
• [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory
card has print settings that were configured on another camera.
Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all
previous settings.
• Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date
twice.
• Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both [Date] and [File
No.] at the same time.
• Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible
printers (sold separately).
• The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/Time] on the
[3] tab (= 15).
Still Images
zz
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Print Settings] on the [2] tab.
Choose and configure items as desired
(= 25).
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
zz
Press the <n> button, choose
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [2] tab,
and then press the <m> button.
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Print Type
Date
File No.
Clear DPOF
data
Index
Smaller versions of multiple images are printed per sheet.
Both
Both standard and index formats are printed.
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Images are printed with the shooting date.
–
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Images are printed with the file number.
–
All image print list settings are cleared after printing.
–
180
Cover
2 Choose an image.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
zz
You can now specify the number of
copies.
zz
If you specify index printing for the image,
it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel
index printing for the image, press the
<m> button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
3 Specify the number of prints.
Still Images
Before Use
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
zz
Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (= 180), choose
[Select Range] and press the <m>
button.
zz
Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(= 117) to specify images.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the <m> button.
zz
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to specify the number of prints
(up to 99).
zz
To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
zz
Printing quantity cannot be specified for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
zz
When finished, press the <n> button
to return to the menu screen.
Still Images
Setting Up Printing for All Images
zz
Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (= 180), choose
[Select All Images] and press the <m>
button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
181
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Adding Images to a Photobook
Clearing All Images from the Print List
zz
Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (= 180), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the <m>
button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Still Images
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when ordering
printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
zz
Press the <n> button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [1] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
zz
When images have been added to the
print list (= 180 – 181), the screen
at left is displayed after you connect
the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer. Press the <o><p> buttons to
choose [Print now], and then simply press
the <m> button to print the images in the
print list.
zz
Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
• [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory
card has print settings that were configured on another camera.
Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all
previous settings.
• After importing images to your computer, also refer to “Software Instruction
Manual” (= 173) and the printer manual for further information.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
182
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Adding Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
zz
Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 182), choose
[Select] and press the <m> button.
2 Choose an image.
Adding All Images to a Photobook
zz
Following the procedure in “Adding
Images Individually” (= 183), choose
[Select All Images] and press the <m>
button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
zz
[ ] is displayed.
zz
To remove the image from the photobook,
press the <m> button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
zz
Repeat this process to specify other
images.
zz
When finished, press the <n> button
to return to the menu screen.
Still Images
Removing All Images from a Photobook
zz
Following the procedure in “Adding
Images Individually” (= 183), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the <m>
button.
zz
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
183
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Appendix
Basic Guide
Helpful information when using the camera
Troubleshooting.............................................. 185
On-Screen Messages...................................... 188
On-Screen Information................................... 191
Shooting (Information Display)............................. 191
Playback (Detailed Information Display).............. 192
Functions and Menu Tables........................... 193
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode........ 193
FUNC. Menu........................................................ 195
4 Shooting Tab Menu........................................ 198
3 Set Up Tab Menu............................................ 203
My Menu Tab Menu........................................ 203
Advanced Guide
1 Playback Tab Menu........................................ 203
2 Print Tab Menu................................................ 203
Handling Precautions..................................... 204
Specifications.................................................. 204
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
184
Troubleshooting
Cover
Strange display on the screen under low light (= 24).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
Before Use
If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
• The screen may flicker under fluorescent or LED lighting.
Common Camera
Operations
Power
No date stamp is added to images.
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
• Confirm that the battery pack is charged (= 12).
• Confirm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (= 13).
• Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (= 14).
• Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a
cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
• Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery pack a
little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals do not touch
any metal objects.
• If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon after
charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
• Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the cover,
turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (= 14).
The battery pack is swollen.
• Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a Canon
Customer Support Help Desk.
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (= 172).
Shooting
• Configure the [Date Stamp
] setting (= 40). Note that date stamps are not
added to images automatically, merely because you have configured the [Date/Time]
setting (= 15).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
• Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (= 82, 87).
Index
• Date stamps are not added in shooting modes (= 202) in which this setting cannot
be configured (= 40).
[h] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and
shooting is not possible (= 33).
[
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (= 33).
• Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (= 91).
• Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [h] (= 87).
• Increase the ISO speed (= 72).
• Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this case, you
should set [IS Mode] to [Off] (= 91).
Shots are out of focus.
• Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way
down to shoot (= 23).
• Make sure subjects are within focusing range (= 206).
• Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (= 51).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shots are blurry.
• Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending on
shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.
Cannot shoot.
• In Playback mode (= 103), press the shutter button halfway (= 23).
185
Cover
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
• To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button
halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
Subjects in shots look too dark.
Subjects are affected by red-eye (= 47).
• Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (= 51) to activate the red-eye reduction lamp
(= 3) in flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye reduction
lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range.
• Edit images using red-eye correction (= 127).
• Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [h] (= 87).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting
is slower.
• Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 70).
• Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 161).
• Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (= 74, 126).
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
• Use AE lock or spot metering (= 71).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
• Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in Each
Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab Menu” (= 193 – 202).
• Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [!] (= 31).
The Babies or Children icon does not display.
• Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 70).
• The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face
information (= 41). If the icons still do not display even when you set the birthday,
re-register face information (= 41), or make sure that the date/time are set
correctly (= 158).
• Use AE lock or spot metering (= 71).
• Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the flash firing (= 33).
• Shoot within flash range (= 206).
• Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output
level (= 88, 96).
• Increase the ISO speed (= 72).
Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
Touch AF/Touch Shutter cannot be activated.
• Touch AF and Touch Shutter cannot be activated by touching the edges of the screen.
Try touching closer to the center of the screen.
Cannot shoot planetarium stars well in [
] mode.
• Shoot actual starry skies instead.
• Shoot within flash range (= 206).
Shooting Movies
• Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [!] (= 31).
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
• Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output
level (= 88, 96).
• Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports highspeed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the length of
movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time (= 160, 206).
White dots or similar image artifacts appear in flash shots.
• This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
• Lower the ISO speed (= 72).
• High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (= 55).
[
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to the
memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
• Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 161).
• Lower the image quality (= 48).
• Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (= 206).
186
Computer
Zooming is not possible.
• Zooming is not possible in [
] mode (= 64).
• Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [
modes.
] (= 58) and [
] (= 67)
Subjects look distorted.
• Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
• Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename files or
alter the folder structure. Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (= 173) for details
on folder structure and file names.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
• Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (= 161).
• There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that
have slow read speeds.
• When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may skip
if computer performance is inadequate.
Sound is not played during movies.
• Adjust the volume (= 104) if you have activated [Mute] (= 157) or the sound in
the movie is faint.
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
• Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (= 22).
Before Use
When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
• Press the <1> button to enter Playback mode. Hold the <n> button down as
you press the <o> and <m> buttons at the same time. On the next screen, press
the <q><r> buttons to choose [B], and then press the <m> button.
Common Camera
Operations
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the <o> button.
Playback is not possible.
• No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] (= 58), [ ] (= 65), or [
(= 67) mode because audio is not recorded in these modes.
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
Wi-Fi
Playback
]
Cover
• The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and try
again.
• In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnified display or
index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the Wi-Fi menu
cannot be accessed during group playback or filtered image display according to
specified conditions. Cancel group or filtered image playback.
• The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Cannot add a device/destination.
• A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new devices/
destinations (= 153).
• Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (= 133).
• To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application CameraWindow on your
smartphone (= 136).
• To add a computer, first install the CameraWindow application on your computer. Also
check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (= 137, 140).
• Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave
ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
187
On-Screen Messages
Cannot connect to the access point.
• Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the camera
(= 205). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to specify a
supported channel manually.
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
No memory card
Cannot send images.
• The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space on
the destination device and resend the images.
• The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the
locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
• RAW images cannot be sent. In [
] mode, only the JPEG images are sent.
• Images cannot be sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent
using Image Sync via an access point (= 151). Before moving or renaming these
image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already been sent
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Memory card locked
Advanced Guide
• The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the
write-protect tab to the unlocked position (= 13).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cannot record!
• Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (= 14).
Memory card error (= 161)
• Movies cannot be resized.
Insufficient space on card
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
• There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (= 30, 53, 69, 93)
or edit images (= 124 – 127). Either erase unneeded images (= 118) or insert a
memory card with enough free space (= 13).
] or [
]
• Movies may take a long time to send.
Touch AF unavailable
• Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave
ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band. Note
that images may take a long time to send even when [ ] is displayed.
• Touch AF is not available in the current shooting mode (= 194).
• Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
• When sending images to a computer from a memory card with a large amount
of images (approximately 1,000), the connection may be disrupted. Import any
necessary images to a computer, and then reduce the number of images on the
memory card by erasing unnecessary images.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
• Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original size.
• Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [
to reduce sending time (= 148).
Before Use
• The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory card
facing the correct way (= 14).
• If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a supported
memory card (= 2) and have inserted it facing the correct way (= 14), contact
a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Cannot resize images for sending.
Cover
Touch AF canceled
• The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (= 86).
Charge the battery (= 12)
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
No Image.
• The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (= 116)
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
• Reset the Wi-Fi settings (= 155).
188
Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play
back MOV
• Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
• It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer,
or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/
Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to
category/Unselectable image./No identification information
• The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already
edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that starred (*)
functions are not available for movies. Edit ID Info* (= 112 – 113), Magnify*
(= 113), Smart Shuffle* (= 115), Rotate (= 120), Favorites (= 121), Edit*
(= 124 – 127), Print List* (= 180), and Photobook Set-up* (= 182).
• Grouped images cannot be processed (= 79).
Cover
Naming error!
• The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the highest
supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been reached and
the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders has been reached.
On the [3] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset] (= 161), or format the
memory card (= 160).
Lens Error
• This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is used
in dusty or sandy locations.
• Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
A camera error was detected (error number)
• If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not have
been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
• When specifying a range for image selection (= 117, 120, 181), you attempted to
choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.
• Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case,
write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Exceeded selection limit
File Error
• More than 998 images were selected for Print List (= 180) or Photobook Set-up
(= 182). Choose 998 images or less.
• Correct printing (= 176) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Invalid selection range
• Print List (= 180) or Photobook Set-up (= 182) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
Print error
• You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (= 116), Erase
(= 118), Favorites (= 121), Print List (= 180), or Photobook Set-up (= 182).
• Check the paper size setting (= 178). If this error message is displayed when the
setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again.
Communication error
Ink absorber full
• An excessive amount of images (approx. 1,000) on the memory card prevented
printing or image transfer to a computer. To transfer the images, use a commercially
available USB card reader. To print, insert the memory card directly into the printer
card slot.
• Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
189
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
• No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (= 140).
• A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
Cover
Receiving failed
Insufficient space on card
• There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to receive
images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a memory card
with sufficient space.
• Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
Cannot determine access point
• The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
• The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
No access points found
• Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
• When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
• When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999) have
been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insufficient space on server
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
• Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create space.
• Check the access point security settings (= 140).
• Save the images sent via Image Sync (= 151) to your computer.
IP address conflict
Check network settings
• Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another.
• Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
• You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
• Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices,
and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
• Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
• Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Sending failed
Memory card error
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
190
Cover
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
Red-eye correction
(= 47)
Shooting mode
(= 193), Scene
icon (= 34)
Flash exposure
compensation /
Flash output level
(= 88, 96)
Drive mode
(= 79)
My Colors (= 78)
Self-timer (= 38)
IS mode icon
(= 35)
Battery level
(= 191)
Compression (image
quality) (= 91)
/ Resolution
(= 47), RAW
(= 90)
Recordable shots
(= 205)
Movie resolution
(= 48, 68)
Digital zoom
magnification
(= 36), Digital
tele-converter
(= 82)
Remaining time
(= 206)
Histogram (= 106)
Focusing range
(= 55, 80), AF
lock (= 87)
Blink detection
(= 50)
AF frame (= 82),
Spot AE point frame
(= 71)
Date stamp
(= 40)
DR correction
(= 75)
Camera shake
warning (= 33)
AE lock (= 71),
FE lock (= 89)
Shutter speed
(= 94, 95)
Electronic level
(= 49)
Aperture value
(= 94, 95)
Exposure
compensation level
(= 70)
ISO speed (= 72)
Grid lines (= 98)
Flash mode
(= 87)
Hybrid Auto mode
(= 32)
Metering method
(= 71)
Touch Shutter
(= 39)
White balance
(= 76)
Mercury lamp
correction (= 48)
ND filter (= 75)
Eco mode (= 159)
AEB shooting
(= 74), Focus
bracketing (= 81)
Shadow correction
(= 75)
Zoom bar (= 30)
Wind filter (= 33)
Time zone (= 158)
Image stabilization
(= 91)
MF indicator
(= 80)
Exposure shift bar
(= 67)
Exposure level
(= 95)
Exposure
compensation bar
(= 70)
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display
Details
Sufficient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufficient
(Blinking red)
[Charge the battery]
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon
Depleted—charge the battery pack immediately
191
Cover
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
Group playback
(= 111), Image
quality / Frame
rate (movies)
(= 48, 67)
Compression (image
quality) (= 91)
/ Resolution
(= 47), Digest
movies (= 107),
RAW (= 90),
MP4 (movies)
Still images:
Resolution (= 205)
Movies: Playback
time (= 206)
File size
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV
(= 169).
Summary of Movie Control Panel in “Viewing” (= 104)
Movies (= 30, 104)
Current image no. /
Total no. of images
Histogram (= 106)
Battery level
(= 191)
Wi-Fi signal strength
(= 148)
Image Sync
(= 151)
Image editing
(= 124 – 127)
Favorites (= 121)
Protection (= 116)
Folder number - File
number (= 161)
Shooting date/time
(= 15)
Shooting mode
(= 193)
Shutter speed
(= 94, 95)
Aperture value
(= 94, 95)
Exposure
compensation level
(= 70), Exposure
shift level (= 67)
ISO speed (= 72),
Playback speed
(= 59)
Metering method
(= 71)
Flash exposure
compensation /
Flash output level
(= 88, 96)
White balance
(= 76)
White balance
correction (= 77),
Mercury lamp
correction (= 48)
My Colors
(= 78, 125)
Focusing range
(= 55, 80)
ND filter (= 75)
Red-eye correction
(= 47, 127)
High ISO NR
(= 73)
DR correction
(= 75)
Shadow correction
(= 75)
Exit
Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [o][p] to adjust the volume.
At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
Play
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (= 129) (To continue skipping backward,
keep holding down the <m> button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the <m> button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the <m> button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (= 129) (To continue skipping forward, keep
holding down the <m> button.)
*
Edit (= 128)
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected (= 129))
c
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer (= 176).
*Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
• During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the previous or
next clip) by pressing the <q><r> buttons.
192
Cover
Functions and Menu Tables
Before Use
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
K
Shooting Mode
D B M G
Function
Exposure Compensation (= 70)
Flash (= 87)
h
Z
!
Flash Exposure Compensation (= 88)
Flash Output Level (= 96)
Aperture Value (= 94, 95)
Shutter Speed (= 94, 95)
Program Shift (= 71)
AE Lock (= 71)/FE Lock (= 89)*3
AE Lock (Movie)/Exposure Shift (= 67)*4
AF Lock (when assigned to the < > button) (= 99)
Focusing Range (= 55, 80, 87)
 8
f/AF Lock
S P t
I
E
*1
–
O
O
O –
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O –
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
2
2
O O O O –
O O O O –
– – – – –
–
–
–
O O O O O
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
O – – – O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O
O – – – –
– – – – –
O – – – O
O O O O
– – O –
– – – O
O O O O
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
*
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
* O
*1 O
– –
O
O
–
O
O
–
*1 O
O
O
O O
O –
– –
O –
O O
1
e
E
O
O
–
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Not available, but switches to [Z] in some cases.
*3 FE lock not available in [!] flash mode.
*4 In modes other than [E], AE lock and Exposure shift are only available when shooting
movies.
*
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
– O O O
– O O O
– *2 – –
O O O O
– – – –
– – – –
– – – –
– – – –
– – – –
– – – –
– – – –
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O –
–
– O O O O – O O O O –
– O O O O – O O O O –
– – – – – – – – – – –
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
O –
O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O
O – O O
– – – –
O – O O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O
O O O O
– – – –
O O O –
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Common Camera
Operations
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O
O O O O O O
– – – – – –
O O O O O O
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
193
Cover
K
Shooting Mode
Before Use
D B M G
Function
Move AF Frame (= 83)
Face Select (= 85)
Touch AF (= 83)
Touch Shutter (= 39)
Screen Display (= 24)
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Only available when faces are detected.
*3 No tracking, but AF frames can be specified.
*4 Only available for shooting. Subject designation not available.
*1
O
O
O
E
S P t
I
–
–
O
O
*3
O
O
O
O – – –
O O O O
O *2 *2 *2
O – – –
O O
O O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O – – – – – – O O O O – O O – O O O O O O O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
*4
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
– – O
– O O
– O O
*4 O O
E
–
–
–
*4
– – –
– O O
– – –
– * 3 *3
– O
O O
– O
*3 O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*3
–
Common Camera
Operations
O
–
Basic Guide
*3
Advanced Guide
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
194
Cover
FUNC. Menu
Before Use
K
Shooting Mode
D B M G
E
S P t
I
Function
DR Correction (= 75)
E
Basic Guide
 
Shadow Correct (= 75)
O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O –
– – – – – – – – O – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
–
Advanced Guide
–
–
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
O –
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 O
*1 –
O
O
O –
–
O
O
*1 O
O
O
O O
O –
O
–
*1 O
O
O
O –
–
*1 O
O
O
O O
–
O
O
*1 O
O
O
–
–
ISO Speed (= 72)
*1
 – 
White Balance (= 76)
1
O
O
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O –
O –
O –
O –
*1 O
– –
O
–
O
–
O O
– –
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O –
O –
*
 
 
 
 
 S
h
 
White Balance Correction (= 77)
Drive Mode (= 79)
*
Common Camera
Operations
3
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Advanced settings not available.
*3 [ ] is set with [f], AF lock, or [t].
O
–
–
O
–
O O O O
O O O –
O O O –
O O O –
– – – *2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
*2 *2
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O O O
– – –
– – –
O – –
*2 – –
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O O
O –
– –
O –
– –
– O O O – O O O O – O O O O –
– O O O – O O O O – O O O O –
–
–
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
195
Cover
K
Shooting Mode
Before Use
D B M G
4
4
    *  * 
Bracketing (= 74, 81)
S P t
I
Function
Self-Timer (= 38)
] [ $
Self-Timer Settings (= 39)
Delay*2
Shots*3
My Colors (= 78)
E
E
Common Camera
Operations
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O O
O O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O – – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O O
O –
O
O
O
O
*1 O
O
O
*1 O
O
O
O O
O –
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– O O O – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – O –
*1 O
*1 –
O
O
O
O
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1 O
O
O
O O
O –
O –
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O –
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1 O
O
O
O –
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
O
O
O –
O
O O O O O O –
Advanced Guide
 
 
 
 
 
*5
–
–
–
–
–
–
– O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Metering Method (= 71)
*
 
ND Filter (= 75)
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– O O
Still Image Aspect Ratio (= 46)
 
 
 
 
Basic Guide
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*3 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*4 White balance is not available.
*5 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin
tone.
*6 Only [ ] and [ ] are available.
– O O O –
–
–
*6
–
–
– O O O –
–
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
196
Cover
K
Shooting Mode
Before Use
D B M G
   
Compression (= 91)
S P t
I
Function
Image Type (= 90)
   
Resolution (= 47)
E
–
O
O
O –
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O O
O –
O
*1 O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O – – – – O O O – – – – – – – – – – O O
*1 O
O
O
O –
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O – O O O O O O O – O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O
O O O O O O – O O O O O O O *2 O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Common Camera
Operations
*1 O
–
–
E
–
–
–
Movie Quality (= 48, 68)
*
 
 
1
O
O
O
O O
O
*1 O
O
O
O O
O
1
* O
– –
O
–
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (= 59).
O
–
O O
– –
O
–
O –
O –
O –
– O
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
197
Cover
4 Shooting Tab Menu
Before Use
K
Shooting Mode
D B M G
Function
AF Frame (= 82)
Face AiAF*2
1-point
AF Frame Size*3 (= 83)
Normal
Small
Touch Shutter (= 39)
On
Off
Digital Zoom (= 36)
Standard
Off
1.5/2.0x
AF-Point Zoom (= 49)
On
Off
E
S P t
I
E
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O O
O –
O
–
O O O O – – – O – O – O O – – O O O O O O O O
O – – – O O O – O O O – O O – O – O O O O O O
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O –
O –
–
–
O
O
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O O
O O
O
O
O – – – – – – O – O O O O O – O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O O
O –
O
O
–
O O O O – – – – O O O – – – – – – – – – – O –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O –
O O
O
O
O O O O – – – – O O – – O – – – – – O O O – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode.
*3 Available when the AF frame is set to [1-point].
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– O O –
– O O –
– O O – O – O O O O O O
– O – – O – O O O O O O
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
198
Cover
K
Shooting Mode
Before Use
D B M G
Function
Servo AF (= 84)
On
Off*2
Continuous AF (= 84)
On
Off
AF-assist Beam (= 51)
On
Off
MF-Point Zoom (= 81)
Off
2x/4x
Safety MF (= 80)
On
Off
MF Peaking Settings (= 81)
Peaking
On/Off
Level
High/Low
Color
Red/Blue/Yellow
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
] mode.
*2 [On] when subject movement is detected in [
E
S P t
I
–
E
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O –
O O
O
O – – – – – – – O O – – O – – – – – O O O – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O O
O –
O
–
O O O O – – – O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O
O – – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – –
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O O
O O
O
O
O O O O – – – O – O – O O O O O O O O O O O O
O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O O
O –
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O – – – O O O – O O – – O – – – – – O O O – –
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O –
O O
–
O
O – – – O O O O O O – O O O O O – O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O –
O –
O –
–
–
–
O
O
O
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
–
–
–
–
–
–
– O O O O O O – O O O O O – O O O O O O
– O O O O O O – O O O O O – O O O O O O
– O O O O O O – O O O O O – O O O O O O
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
199
Cover
K
Shooting Mode
Before Use
D B M G
Function
Flash Settings (= 47, 51, 88, 89, 96)
Auto
Flash Mode
Manual
On
Red-Eye Corr.
Off
On
Red-Eye Lamp
Off
Flash Exp. Comp
Flash Output
Shutter Sync.
1st-curtain/2nd-curtain
On
Safety FE
Off
ISO Auto Settings (= 73)
Max ISO Speed
Rate of Change
High ISO NR (= 73)
Standard/High/Low
Hg Lamp Corr. (= 48)
On/Off
Spot AE Point (= 71)
Center/AF Point
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
–
Common Camera
Operations
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O –
– – – –
O – O –
O O O –
O – O –
O O O –
– – – –
– – – –
– – – –
O O O –
– – – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O –
– – – – –
– – – – –
O O O O –
O O O O –
O O O O –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
O O O O –
– – – – –
O O O O –
– – – – –
– – – – –
O O O O –
O O O O –
O O O O –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
O O O O –
– – – – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O –
O –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O
– –
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O –
O O
O –
–
–
O
O
O
–
*1 O
O
–
–
*1 O
*1
*1
E
O O O O –
– – – – –
O O O O –
O O O O –
O O O O –
O O O O –
– – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
O O O O –
– – – – –
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
S P t
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
E
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
200
Cover
K
Shooting Mode
Before Use
D B M G
Function
Safety Shift (= 94)
On
Off
Wind Filter (= 33)
Auto/Off
Review image after shooting (= 52)
Display Time
Off/Quick/2 sec./4 sec./8 sec./Hold
Display Info
Off/Detailed
Blink Detection (= 50)
On
Off
Custom Display (= 98)
Shooting Info/Grid Lines/Electronic Level/Histogram
Night Display (= 92)
On/Off
FUNC. Menu Layout (= 100)
IS Settings (= 91)
Off
IS Mode
Continuous
Shoot Only
1
Dynamic IS
2
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Only [2 sec.], [4 sec.], and [8 sec.] are available.
–
E
S P t
I
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
E
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Common Camera
Operations
*1 –
*1 O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
*1 O
O
O
O O
O
O O O O O O – O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O –
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O O
O O
O
O
O O O O O O *2 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O –
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O O
O O
O
O
O O O O – – – – – O – – O – – – – – – O O – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
O
O
O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
O O
O
O
O
O
O –
O O
–
O
– – – – O O O – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
– O
O O
– O
O O
O O O – O
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O O
O O
– –
O –
O O
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
201
Cover
K
Shooting Mode
Before Use
D B M G
Function
Date Stamp
(= 40)
Off
Date/Date & Time
Digest Type (= 32)
Include Stills/No Stills
Save
Stills (= 66)
On/Off
Star Emphasis (= 64)
On/Off
Face ID Settings (= 41)
Set Control Ring Func. (= 97)
button (= 99)
Set
Set
button (= 99)
Save Settings (= 101)
E
S P t
I
E
Common Camera
Operations
*1 O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O O
O O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O – – – – O O O – – – – – – – – – – – –
–
–
–
–
– O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– O –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
– – – – O – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
O
–
O
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
-Names of people in shots taken using Face ID (= 41) may not be displayed in some
modes or with some settings, but they will be recorded in the still images.
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
202
Cover
3 Set Up Tab Menu
Item
1 Playback Tab Menu
Ref. Page
Item
Item
Ref. Page
Before Use
Ref. Page
Item
Ref. Page
Mute
= 157
Create Folder
= 162
Image Search
= 109
Cropping
= 125
Common Camera
Operations
Volume
= 157
Units
= 162
List/Play Digest Movies
= 108
Resize
= 124
Basic Guide
Sound Options
= 157
Electronic Level
= 162
Smart Shuffle
= 115
My Colors
= 125
Hints & Tips
= 158
Video System
= 172
Slideshow
= 114
Face ID Info
= 108
Date/Time
= 15
Ctrl via HDMI
= 170
Erase
Transition Effect
= 158
= 105
Touch Operation
= 163
= 118
Time Zone
Index Effect
= 108
Touch Response
= 163
= 116
Lens Retract
= 159
Protect
= 159
= 120
Scroll Display
= 105
Wi-Fi Settings
= 130
Rotate
= 22, 159
= 163
Favorites
= 121
Group Images
Copyright Info
= 111
= 164
Eco Mode
Power Saving
LCD Brightness
= 160
Certification Logo Display
Start-up Image
= 160
Language
= 16
= 160, 161
Reset All
= 165
Format
= 161
File Numbering
My Menu settings
= 182
Auto Rotate
= 121
= 126
Resume
= 105
Red-Eye Correction
= 127
Set Touch Actions
= 122
2 Print Tab Menu
My Menu Tab Menu
Item
Photobook Set-up
i-Contrast
Item
= 102
Item
Ref. Page
Select All Images
= 181
Select Images & Qty.
= 180
Clear All Selections
= 182
Select Range
= 181
Print Settings
= 180
Print
Ref. Page
Ref. Page
–
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
203
Handling Precautions
• The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
Specifications
Cover
Before Use
Camera Effective
Pixels (Max.)
Approx. 12.1 million pixels
Common Camera
Operations
Lens Focal Length
5x zoom: 5.2 (W) – 26.0 (T) mm
(35mm film equivalent: 24 (W) – 120 (T) mm)
Basic Guide
LCD Monitor
3.0-type color TFT LCD
Effective Pixels: Approx. 922,000 dots
Advanced Guide
File Format
Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version 1.1)
compliant
Data Type
Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG), RAW (CR2 (Canon Original))
Movies: MP4 (Video: H.264; Audio: MPEG2 AAC-LC (stereo))
• To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to warm
environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and
let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag.
Interface
Hi-speed USB
HDMI output
Analog audio output (stereo)
Analog video output (NTSC/PAL)
Power Source
Battery Pack NB-6LH
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40
• If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
Dimensions (Based
on CIPA Guidelines)
100.2 x 59.0 x 29.0 mm (3.94 x 2.32 x 1.14 in.)
Weight (Based on
CIPA Guidelines)
Approx. 217 g (approx. 7.65 oz.; including the battery pack
and memory card)
Approx. 193 g (approx. 6.81 oz.; camera body only)
• Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction or
erase image data.
• If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry
soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force.
• Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera or
screen.
• Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
• Before long-term battery storage, use up the battery pack’s remaining
charge, remove it from the camera, and store it in a plastic bag or similar
container. Storing a partially charged battery pack over extended periods
(about a year) may shorten its life or affect performance.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
204
Cover
Wi-Fi Functions
Standards
Transmission
Methods
OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)
DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b)
Recording Pixels
Communication
Modes
Infrastructure mode*1, Ad hoc mode*2
*1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup
*2 Wi-Fi Certified IBSS
Supported Channels
1 – 11 (PC2036, PC2061) or 1 – 13 (PC2003)
Model numbers indicated in parentheses (= 211)
Security
Before Use
Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card
IEEE802.11b/g/n*
*2.4 GHz band only
WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
Approx. 230
Eco Mode On
Movie Recording Time*
1
Continuous
Shooting*2
Playback Time
(Large)
12M/4000x3000
(Medium 1)
6M/2816x2112
(Medium 2)
2M/1600x1200
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Shots
Compression
Ratio
Approx. 300
Approx. 30 minutes
Approx. 1 hour
Approx. 4 hours
*1Time under default camera settings, when normal operations are performed, such as
shooting, pausing, turning the camera on and off, and zooming.
*2Time available when shooting the maximum movie length (until recording stops
automatically) repeatedly.
•The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement guidelines of the
Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
•Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording time may be less
than mentioned above.
•Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
(Small)
0.3M/640x480
RAW Images
4000x3000
–
Number of Shots per Memory Card
(Approx. shots)
8 GB
32 GB
1379
5568
2192
8850
2431
9814
3721
15020
7442
30040
12927
52176
27291
110150
40937
165225
446
1804
•The values in the table are measured according to Canon standards and may change
depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.
•The values in the table are based on 4:3 aspect ratio. If the aspect ratio is changed
(= 46), more images can be shot because the data size per image will be smaller
than with 4:3 images. However, since [ ] 16:9 images have a setting of 1920 x 1080
pixels, their data size will be larger than 4:3 images.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
205
Cover
Recording Time per Memory Card
Image Quality
Before Use
Shooting Range
Recording Time per Memory Card
8 GB
32 GB
30 min. 03 sec.
2 hr. 01 min. 27 sec.
43 min. 29 sec.
2 hr. 55 min. 43 sec.
2 hr. 03 min. 55 sec.
8 hr. 20 min. 32 sec.
5 hr. 14 min. 34 sec.
21 hr. 10 min. 33 sec.
•The values in the table are measured according to Canon standards and may change
depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.
•Recording will automatically stop when the clip file size reaches 4 GB, or when the
recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59 seconds when shooting in
], [
] or [
], or approximately 1 hour when shooting in [
].
[
•Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been reached on some
memory cards. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended.
Flash Range
Maximum Wide Angle
Shooting Mode Focusing Range
(j)
Common Camera
Operations
3 cm – infinity
(1.2 in. – infinity)
30 cm – infinity
(11.8 in. – infinity)
Basic Guide
5 cm – infinity
(2.0 in. – infinity)
30 cm – infinity
(11.8 in. – infinity)
Advanced Guide
e*
3 – 50 cm
(1.2 in. – 1.6 ft.)
30 – 50 cm
(11.8 in. – 1.6 ft.)
f*
3 cm – infinity
(1.2 in. – infinity)
30 cm – infinity
(11.8 in. – infinity)
3 – 50 cm
(1.2 in. – 1.6 ft.)
–
1.5 – 20 m
(4.9 – 66 ft.)
1.5 – 20 m
(4.9 – 66 ft.)
–
Other modes
Maximum Telephoto
(i)
8
*Not available in some shooting modes.
Continuous Shooting Speed
Maximum wide angle (j)
50 cm – 7.0 m (1.6 – 23 ft.)
Continuous Shooting Mode
Maximum telephoto (i)
50 cm – 2.3 m (1.6 – 7.5 ft.)
W
Speed
Approx. 12.1 shots/sec.
Approx. 9.4 shots/sec.*
Approx. 5.5 shots/sec.
Approx. 5.6 shots/sec.
*From the sixth shot.
•Based on Canon testing standards, using a 8 GB UHS-I memory card. Note that the
number of shots will vary depending on subjects, the brand of memory card, and other
factors.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
206
Cover
Shutter Speed
[
] mode, automatically set range
Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE
1 – 1/2500 sec.
250, 200, 160, 125, 100, 80, 60, 50, 40, 30, 25,
20, 15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1,
0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10,
Available values in [M] or [D] mode
1/13, 1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60,
(sec.)*
1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320,
1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250,
1/1600, 1/2000, 1/2500
*In [M] mode, shutter speeds of 20 seconds or slower are not available.
Aperture
f/number
f/1.8 – f/8.0 (W), f/5.7 – f/8.0 (T)
Available values in [B] mode*
f/1.8, f/2.0, f/2.2, f/2.5, f/2.8, f/3.2, f/3.5, f/4.0,
f/4.5, f/5.0, f/5.6, f/5.7, f/6.3, f/7.1, f/8.0
*Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available.
Battery Pack NB-6LH
Type:
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Nominal Voltage:
3.7 V DC
Nominal Capacity:
1060 mAh
Charging Cycles:
Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures:0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Dimensions:
34.4 x 41.8 x 6.9 mm (1.35 x 1.65 x 0.27 in.)
Approx. 22 g (approx. 0.78 oz.)
Weight:
Rated Input:
100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz), 0.085 A (100 V) – 0.05 A (240 V)
Rated Output:
4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Approx. 2 hr. (when using NB-6LH)
Charging Time:
Charge Indicator:Charging: orange / Fully charged: green
(two-indicator system)
Operating Temperatures:0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
• All data is based on tests by Canon.
• Camera specifications or appearance are subject to change without
notice.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
207
Cover
Index
Display language.................................. 16
DPOF.................................................. 180
1-point (AF frame mode)...................... 82
Camera
Reset all....................................... 165
Camera access point mode................ 145
A
Camera shake...................................... 91
Numbers
AC adapter kit............................. 168, 172
CameraWindow (computer)............... 137
Accessories........................................ 168
CameraWindow (smartphone)........... 136
AEB shooting........................................ 74
CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.......................... 131, 133, 134
AE lock................................................. 71
AF frames............................................. 82
AF lock................................................. 87
Aspect ratio.......................................... 46
AUTO mode (shooting mode)... 17, 23, 30
Av (shooting mode).............................. 94
Clock.................................................... 28
Color (white balance)........................... 76
Compression ratio (image quality)........ 91
Connecting via an access point.......... 140
Connecting without an access point... 145
Continuous shooting............................. 79
B
Control ring........................................... 96
Drive mode........................................... 79
Dynamic Range Correction.................. 75
E
Eco mode........................................... 159
Editing
Cropping....................................... 125
i-Contrast...................................... 126
My Colors..................................... 125
Red-eye correction....................... 127
Resizing images........................... 124
Editing or erasing connection
information.......................................... 153
Electronic level..................................... 49
Erasing................................................118
Error messages.................................. 188
Flash
Deactivating flash........................... 88
Flash exposure compensation....... 88
On.................................................. 87
Slow synchro.................................. 88
Focus bracketing.................................. 81
Focusing
AF frames....................................... 82
AF lock........................................... 87
AF-point zoom................................ 49
Face select..................................... 85
MF peaking.................................... 81
Servo AF........................................ 84
Touch AF........................................ 86
Focusing range
Macro............................................. 80
Manual focus.................................. 80
Quick.............................................. 55
Underwater Macro.......................... 55
Focus lock............................................ 82
Custom white balance.......................... 76
D
F
Face AiAF (AF frame mode)................. 83
C
Date/time
Adding date stamps....................... 40
Changing........................................ 16
Date/time battery............................ 16
Settings.......................................... 15
World clock................................... 158
DC coupler......................................... 172
Defaults → Reset all
C (shooting mode)................................ 97
Digital tele-converter............................ 82
Fireworks (shooting mode)................... 55
High dynamic range (shooting mode).. 56
Digital zoom.......................................... 36
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode)........... 58
Household power............................... 172
Creative filters (shooting mode)........... 56
Cropping..................................... 125, 177
Battery charger............................... 2, 168
Battery pack
Charging......................................... 12
Eco mode..................................... 159
Level............................................. 191
Power saving.................................. 22
Black and white images........................ 78
Blink detection...................................... 50
Face ID................................................. 41
Face select........................................... 85
Face self-timer (shooting mode)........... 63
Favorites............................................. 121
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Focus check........................................113
Exposure
AE lock........................................... 71
Compensation................................ 70
FE lock........................................... 89
Background defocus
(shooting mode)................................... 60
Batteries → Date/time (Date/time battery)
Before Use
FUNC. menu
Basic operations............................. 24
Table............................................. 195
FUNC. menu layout............................ 100
G
GPS information display............. 106, 107
H
FE lock................................................. 89
Handheld nightscene
(shooting mode)................................... 54
File numbering.................................... 161
HDMI cable......................................... 168
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
208
Cover
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode)................ 32
I
i-Contrast...................................... 74, 126
Image quality → Compression ratio
(image quality)
Image Sync........................................ 151
Images
Display period................................ 52
Erasing..........................................118
Playback → Viewing
Protecting......................................116
Indicator................................................ 28
ISO speed............................................ 72
Movies
Editing.......................................... 128
Image quality
(resolution/frame rate).............. 48, 67
Recording time............................. 206
Multi-area White Balance..................... 48
My Colors..................................... 78, 125
Nostalgic (shooting mode).................... 57
P
P (shooting mode)................................ 70
Lamp.................................................... 51
PictBridge................................... 169, 176
Playback → Viewing
Magnified display.................................113
Manual focus (focusing range)............. 80
Memory cards......................................... 2
Recording time............................. 206
Menu
Basic operations............................. 25
Table............................................. 193
Mercury lamp correction....................... 48
Portrait (shooting mode)................. 54, 55
Resizing images................................. 124
Resolution (image size)........................ 47
Rotating.............................................. 120
S
Screen
Display language............................ 16
Icons..................................... 191, 192
Menu → FUNC. menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→ Memory cards
Searching........................................... 109
Power................................................. 168
→ AC adapter kit
→ Battery charger
→ Battery pack
Self-timer.............................................. 38
2-second self-timer......................... 38
Customizing the self-timer.............. 39
Face self-timer (shooting mode).... 63
Wink self-timer (shooting mode).... 62
Sending images.................................. 148
Power saving........................................ 22
Sending images to a computer........... 133
Printing............................................... 176
Sending images to another camera... 132
Program AE.......................................... 70
Sending images to a printer............... 133
Protecting............................................116
Sending images to a smartphone....... 132
Poster effect (shooting mode).............. 56
Metering method.................................. 71
Q
Miniature effect (shooting mode).......... 58
Quick (focusing range)......................... 55
Monochrome (shooting mode)............. 61
Reset all............................................. 165
Saving images to a computer............. 150
Photobook set-up............................... 182
Macro (focusing range)........................ 80
Red-eye correction....................... 47, 127
ND filter................................................. 75
Package contents................................... 2
M (shooting mode)............................... 95
RAW..................................................... 90
Ring function selector button................ 96
N
L
M
R
Sending images to Web services....... 132
Sepia tone images................................ 78
Servo AF............................................... 84
Shadow Correct.................................... 75
Shooting
Shooting date/time → Date/time
Shooting information.............. 98, 191
Slideshow............................................114
Smart Shuffle.......................................115
Smart Shutter (shooting mode)............ 61
Smile (shooting mode)......................... 61
Snow (shooting mode)......................... 54
Soft focus (shooting mode).................. 60
Software
Installation.................................... 137
Saving images to a computer....... 174
Sounds............................................... 157
Star (shooting mode)............................ 64
Star nightscape (shooting mode)... 64
Star time-lapse movie
(shooting mode)............................. 65
Star trails (shooting mode)............. 64
Stereo AV cable.................................. 171
Strap................................................. 2, 12
Super slow motion movie
(movie mode)....................................... 67
Super vivid (shooting mode)................. 56
T
Terminal...................... 170, 171, 172, 176
Touch Actions..................................... 122
Touch AF.............................................. 86
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Touch Shutter....................................... 39
Toy camera effect (shooting mode)...... 59
Traveling with the camera.................. 158
Troubleshooting.................................. 185
TV display........................................... 169
209
Cover
Tv (shooting mode).............................. 94
Before Use
U
Underwater Macro (focusing range)..... 55
Underwater (shooting mode)................ 54
V
Viewing................................................. 19
Image search............................... 109
Index display................................ 108
Magnified display..........................113
Single-image display...................... 19
Slideshow......................................114
Smart Shuffle................................115
TV display.................................... 169
W
White balance (color)........................... 76
Wi-Fi
Connecting and sending
images.......................................... 132
Wi-Fi functions.................................... 130
Wi-Fi menu......................................... 139
Wink self-timer (shooting mode)........... 62
World clock......................................... 158
Wrist strap → Strap
Z
Zoom........................................ 18, 30, 36
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
210
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
• The camera’s model number is PC2036/PC2061/
PC2003. To identify your model, check the label on
the bottom of the camera for a number beginning
with PC. The built-in WLAN module model is written
below.
Country/Region of Purchase
WLAN Module Model
U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan
WM812
Other
WM218
•
• Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certification labels from the product
• According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations, export
permission (or service transaction permission) from the Japanese
government is necessary to export strategic resources or services
(including this product) outside Japan.
Cover
• Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that Canon
accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of
earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
• When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and reset
the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
• Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product
due to loss or theft of the product.
• Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other than
as described in this guide.
• Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
• Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to
or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
211
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
• This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio
waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as
possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time
as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
• Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the
results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown
networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or
using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure
to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to
connect to other unknown networks.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
• Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and
attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
• Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to
cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
212
Cover
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS over IP
enables PictBridge connections in network environments,
and the camera is also compatible with this standard.
FCC/IC Notice
Model: PC2036 (including WLAN Module Model WM812, FCC ID: AZD812)
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Battery Charger CB-2LY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
213
Cover
FCC Notice
(Digital Camera, Model PC2036 systems)
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Trademarks and Licensing
• Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
• App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
•
•
•
•
• The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
• Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
• This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding
MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and
non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the
AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted
or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
214
Cover
Disclaimer
• Reprinting, transmitting, or storing in a retrieval system any part of this
guide without the permission of Canon is prohibited.
• Canon reserves the right to change the contents of this guide at any time
without prior notice.
• Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
• The above items notwithstanding, Canon accepts no liability for damages
due to mistaken operation of the products.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and
C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
215
Download PDF

advertising